Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Deh-X9650bt Deh-X9650sd Deh-X8650bt Deh-X7650 Owner Manual Qrd3230a
Deh-X9650bt Deh-X9650sd Deh-X8650bt Deh-X7650 Owner Manual Qrd3230a
CD RDS RECEIVER
CD RDS 接收機
RDS ﻣﻊ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮCD ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ
CD RDS ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﻩ
English
中文
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
DEH-X9650BT
DEH-X9650SD Owner’s Manual
ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ
用戶手冊
DEH-X8650BT ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ
ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ
DEH-X7650SD
<QRD3230-A>1
Black plate (2,1)
Section
Before you start iPod compatibility 27 Thank you for purchasing this PIONEER
CAUTION
About this unit 2 Sequence of audio files 27 product
Bluetooth profiles 27 To ensure proper use, please read through this This product is a class 1 laser product classi-
If you experience problems 2
Copyright and trademark 27 manual before using this product. It is especially fied under the Safety of laser products, IEC
Specifications 28 important that you read and observe WARN- 60825-1:2007.
Using this unit
Head unit 3 INGs and CAUTIONs in this manual. Please
Remote control 3 keep the manual in a safe and accessible place for
Set up menu 3 future reference.
Attaching the front panel 4
Basic operations 4
Use and care of the remote control 5
About this unit If you experience problems
Frequently used menu operations 5
WARNING Should this unit fail to work properly, please con-
Radio 5
! Do not attempt to install or service this tact your dealer or nearest authorized PIONEER
CD/CD-R/CD-RW and external storage
product by yourself. Installation or serv- Service Station.
devices (USB, SD) 7
iPod 9 icing of this product by persons without
Using Bluetooth wireless technology 10 training and experience in electronic
Streaming Pandoraâ 13 equipment and automotive accessories
Using connected device applications 14 may be dangerous and could expose you
Audio adjustments 15 to the risk of electric shock, injury or
Using different entertainment other hazards.
displays 16 ! Do not attempt to operate the unit while driv-
Selecting the illumination color 16 ing. Make sure to pull off the road and park
Customizing the illumination color 17 your vehicle in a safe location before at-
About MIXTRAX 17 tempting to use the controls on the device.
System menu 18
Set up menu 19 CAUTION
System menu 19
! Do not allow this unit to come into contact
Using an AUX source 19
with liquids. Electrical shock could result.
Turning the display off or on 19
Also, damage to this unit, smoke, and over-
If an unwanted display appears 19
heating could result from contact with
liquids.
Installation
! Always keep the volume low enough to hear
Connections 20
outside sounds.
Installation 21
! Avoid exposure to moisture.
Installing the microphone 22
Additional information
Troubleshooting 23
Error messages 23
Handling guidelines 25
Compressed audio compatibility (disc, USB,
SD) 26
2 En
<QRD3230-A>2
Black plate (3,1)
Section
English
DEH-X9650BT/DEH-X9650SD DEH-X9650BT/DEH-X8650BT
DEH-X9650BT/DEH-X9650SD f Press to start talking to the caller while
Open button
1 2 3 4 5 5 l using the phone.
DEH-X8650BT/DEH-X7650SD
FUNCTION
Detach button
9 g DEH-X9650SD/DEH-X7650SD
6 AUX input jack (3.5 mm stereo jack) m h Press to select functions.
En 3
<QRD3230-A>3
Black plate (4,1)
Section
4 En
<QRD3230-A>4
Black plate (5,1)
Section
! If connecting both USB1/iPod1 and USB2/ ! Do not store the battery with metallic ob- Radio
Adjusting the volume
iPod2 at the same time, use a Pioneer USB jects.
1 Turn M.C. to adjust the volume.
English
cable (CD-U50E) in addition to the regular ! If the battery leaks, wipe the remote control Basic operations
Selecting a source Pioneer USB cable. completely clean and install a new battery.
1 Press SRC/OFF to cycle between: ! When disposing of used batteries, comply 1 23 4 5 6 7
DEH-X9650BT with governmental regulations or environ-
Radio—CD—USB1/iPod1—Pandora1— Use and care of the remote mental public institutions’ rules that apply in
App 1 (application1)—USB2/iPod2— control your country/area.
Pandora2—App 2 (application2)—SD—AUX
—BT Audio Using the remote control Important
DEH-X9650SD ! Do not store the remote control in high tem- 89 a
1 Point the remote control in the direction of the
Radio—CD—USB1/iPod1—Pandora1— front panel to operate. peratures or direct sunlight. RDS
App 1 (application1)—USB2/iPod2— When using for the first time, pull out the film ! The remote control may not function properly
Pandora2—App 2 (application2)—SD—AUX protruding from the tray. in direct sunlight. 1 23 4 5 6 7
DEH-X8650BT ! Do not let the remote control fall onto the
Radio—CD—USB/iPod—Pandora—App (ap- Replacing the battery
floor, where it may become jammed under
plication)—SD—AUX—BT Audio 1 Slide the tray out on the back of the remote
the brake or accelerator pedal.
DEH-X7650SD control.
Radio—CD—USB/iPod—Pandora—App (ap- 2 Insert the battery with the plus (+) and minus
plication)—SD—AUX (–) poles aligned properly. Frequently used menu b
! The service from Pandora is currently only operations Non-RDS or AM
available in Australia and New Zealand. We
recommend that you turn PANDORA off in re- 1 Band indicator
Returning to the previous display
gions in which it is not available. For details, 2 News indicator
Returning to the previous list/category (the folder/
refer to PANDORA (Pandora activation) on 3 Traffic Announce indicator
category one level higher)
page 19. 4 5 (stereo) indicator
1 Press /DISP.
5 Preset number indicator
Notes Returning to the ordinary display 6 LOC indicator
WARNING
! When there is an iPod connected and a ! Keep the battery out of the reach of children. 1 Press BAND/ . Appears when local seek tuning is on.
source other than App is selected, you can Should the battery be swallowed, consult a 7 Signal level indicator
Returning to the ordinary display from the list/cat-
switch to App by pressing APP. doctor immediately. 8 TEXT indicator
egory
! When this unit’s blue/white lead is con- ! Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) Shows when the radio text is received.
1 Press BAND/ .
nected to the vehicle’s auto-antenna relay must not be exposed to excessive heat such 9 PTY label indicator
control terminal, the vehicle’s antenna ex- as sunshine, fire or the like. Selecting a function or list a Program service name
tends when this unit’s source is turned on. 1 Turn M.C. or LEVER. b Frequency indicator
To retract the antenna, turn the source off. ! In this manual, “Turn M.C.” is used to describe
! When there are two USB storage devices CAUTION the operation used to select a function or list. Selecting a band
connected to this unit and you want to ! Remove the battery if the remote control is 1 Press BAND/ until the desired band (FM-1,
switch between them for playback, discon- not used for a month or longer. FM-2, FM-3 for FM or AM) is displayed.
nect communications for the USB storage ! There is a danger of explosion if the battery is
device first before proceeding. Manual tuning (step by step)
incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the
1 Turn LEVER.
same or equivalent type.
! Select Manual (manual tuning) under Tuning
! Do not handle the battery with metallic tools.
Mode to use this function.
En 5
<QRD3230-A>5
Black plate (6,1)
Section
6 En
<QRD3230-A>6
Black plate (7,1)
Section
You can tune in to a station using PTY (program CD/CD-R/CD-RW and external Playing a CD/CD-R/CD-RW Switching between playback memory devices
storage devices (USB, SD) 1 Insert the disc into the disc loading slot with
English
type) information. You can switch between playback memory devices
1 Press M.C. to display the setting mode. the label side up. on USB storage devices with more than one Mass
2 Turn LEVER left or right to select the desired Basic operations Storage Device-compatible memory device.
Ejecting a CD/CD-R/CD-RW
setting. 1 Press BAND/ .
DEH-X9650BT/DEH-X8650BT 1 Press h (eject).
News&Inf—Popular—Classics—Others ! You can switch between up to 32 different
3 Press M.C. to begin the search.
1 2 3 Playing songs on a USB storage device memory devices.
The unit searches for a station broadcasting 1 Plug in the USB storage device using the USB
MTP connection
that type of program. When a station is found, cable.
MTP-compatible Android devices (running
its program service name is displayed. ! Use a Pioneer USB cable to connect the USB
Android OS 4.0 or higher) can be connected by
! To cancel the search, press M.C. again. storage device to the unit.
MTP connection using the USB source. To con-
! The program of some stations may differ
4 5 6 7 Stopping playback of files on a USB storage de- nect an Android device, use the cable that came
from that indicated by the transmitted PTY.
vice with the device.
! If no station is broadcasting the type of pro- DEH-X9650SD/DEH-X7650SD 1 Disconnect the USB storage device. ! This function is not compatible with MIXTRAX.
gram you searched for, Not found is dis-
1 2 3 ! This function is not compatible with WAV.
played for about two seconds and then the Playing songs on an SD memory card
! This function is not compatible with music
tuner returns to the original station. 1 Insert an SD memory card into the SD card
browse.
slot.
Traffic Announce (traffic announcement standby)
Insert it with the contact surface facing down,
and press on the card until it clicks and com- Notes
1 Press M.C. to turn traffic announcement
pletely locks into place. ! Disconnect USB storage devices from the
standby on or off. 4 6 7 5
2 Press SRC/OFF to select SD as the source. unit when not in use.
Alternative FREQ (alternative frequencies search) ! If there are two USB storage devices con-
1 Bit rate/sampling frequency indicator Stopping playback of files on an SD memory card nected to this unit, the device connected to
When the tuner cannot get a good reception, the Shows the bit rate or sampling frequency of 1 Press on the SD memory card until it clicks. the input of the selected source is the one
unit automatically searches for a different station the current track (file) when the compressed The SD memory card is ejected. that is operated.
in the same network. audio is playing. 2 Pull out the SD memory card. ! Disconnect communications for the USB
1 Press M.C. to turn the alternative frequencies ! When playing back VBR (variable bit
Selecting a folder storage device before switching to operation
search on or off. rate)-recorded AAC files, the average bit
1 Press UP or DOWN. of the other device.
rate value is displayed. However, depend-
News interrupt (news program interruption) ing on the software used to decode AAC Selecting a track
files, VBR may be displayed. Operations using the MIXTRAX
1 Press M.C. to turn the NEWS function on or 1 Turn LEVER.
2 Folder number indicator button
off. Fast forwarding or reversing
Shows the current folder number when play-
Tuning Mode (LEVER tuning setting) ing a compressed audio file. 1 Turn and hold down LEVER to the right or left. Turning MIXTRAX on or off
3 Track number indicator ! When playing compressed audio, there is no You can use this function when USB or SD is se-
You can assign a function to the LEVER on the sound during fast forward or reverse.
4 PLAY/PAUSE indicator lected as the source.
unit.
5 S.Rtrv indicator Returning to root folder You cannot use this function with USB MTP.
Select Manual (manual tuning) to tune up or
Appears when Sound Retriever function is 1 Press and hold BAND/ . 1 Press MIX/DISP OFF to turn MIXTRAX on or
down manually or select Preset (preset channel)
on. off.
to switch between preset channels. Switching between compressed audio and CD-DA
6 Song time (progress bar) ! For more details about MIXTRAX, refer to
1 Press M.C. to select Manual or Preset. 1 Press BAND/ .
7 Play time indicator About MIXTRAX on page 17.
En 7
<QRD3230-A>7
Black plate (8,1)
Section
Switching the display 2 Use M.C. to select the desired file name 2 Turn M.C. to change the mode; press to
Playing a song in the selected category
(or folder name). select.
Selecting the desired text information 1 When a category is selected, press and hold
! Artist – Plays an album by the artist currently
M.C.
Changing the file or folder name playing.
% Press /DISP.
1 Turn M.C. Searching the list by alphabet ! Album – Plays a song from the album cur-
1 When a list for the selected category is dis- rently being played.
Creating a new Pandora station Playing
played, press to switch to alphabet search ! Genre – Plays an album from the genre cur-
You can use this function when SD is selected 1 When a file or track is selected, press M.C.
mode. rently being played.
as the source. Viewing a list of the files (or folders) in the se- 2 Turn M.C. to select a letter. The selected song/album will be played after the
You can create a new station in the Pandora lected folder 3 Press M.C. to display the alphabetical list. currently playing song.
source based on the tagged information. 1 When a folder is selected, press M.C. ! To cancel searching, press /DISP.
Notes
1 Press and hold /DISP. Playing a song in the selected folder ! The selected song/album may be canceled if
Notes
1 When a folder is selected, press and hold M.C. you use functions other than link search (e.g.
! This unit must create an index in order to fa-
2 Turn M.C. to select the desired setting. fast forward and reverse).
cilitate Artists, Albums, Songs, and Genres
Track (from track)—Artist (from artist) ! Depending on the song selected to play, the
Browsing for a song searches. Typically, it will take approximately
end of the currently playing song and the be-
You can use this function when USB or SD is se- 70 seconds to create an index for 1 000
3 Press M.C. to select. ginning of the selected song/album may be
lected as the source. songs, and we recommend that up to 3 000
Switches to the Pandora source and displays cut off.
This function is available when ON is selected in songs be used. Please note that certain types
the list of Pandora stations.
Music browse. For details, refer to of file may take longer to index than others.
! Depending on the number of files in the USB
Function settings
4 Turn M.C. to select the desired station. Music browse (music browse) on page 9.
storage device, there may be a delay when 1 Press M.C. to display the main menu.
1 Press (list) to switch to the top menu displaying a list.
5 Press M.C. to select.
of the list search. ! Keys may not have any effect during the cre- 2 Turn M.C. to change the menu option
A new station is created.
ation of an index or list. and press to select FUNCTION.
Note 2 Use M.C. to select a category/song. ! Lists are recreated each time the unit is
This function is disabled when there is no turned on. 3 Turn M.C. to select the function.
tagged information available. Changing the name of the song or category Once selected, the following functions can be
1 Turn M.C. Playing songs related to the adjusted.
Selecting and playing files/ Artists (artists)—Albums (albums)—Songs currently playing song ! Music browse and Link play cannot be used
tracks from the name list (songs)—Genres (genres) when the source is set to CD.
You can use this function when USB or SD is se-
! Link play is not available when OFF is se-
This function is available when OFF is selected Playing lected as the source.
lected in Music browse. For details, refer to
in Music browse. For details, refer to 1 When a song is selected, press M.C. This function is available when ON is selected in
Music browse (music browse) on page 9.
Music browse (music browse) on page 9. Music browse. For details, refer to
Viewing a list of songs in the selected category Music browse (music browse) on page 9.
1 When a category is selected, press M.C.
1 Press (list) to switch to the file/track
name list mode. You can play songs from the following lists.
• Album list of the currently playing artist
• Song list of the currently playing album
• Album list of the currently playing genre
8 En
<QRD3230-A>8
Black plate (9,1)
Section
English
You can browse music on a USB storage device
1 Press M.C. to turn random play on or off.
and SD.
Turning MIXTRAX on or off
1 Press M.C. to select the desired setting. Link play (link play)
1 Press MIX/DISP OFF to turn MIXTRAX on or
! ON – Category/song list can be used.
1 Press M.C. to display the setting mode. off.
! OFF – File/folder list can be used.
2 Turn M.C. to change the mode; press to select. ! For more details about MIXTRAX, refer to
In some cases, a message may appear asking 5 7 8 6 About MIXTRAX on page 17.
whether to create a database on this unit or For details about the settings, refer to Playing
not. If it appears, proceed by completing the songs related to the currently playing song on 1 LINK PLAY indicator
page 8. 2
below steps. Repeat indicator Switching the display
2 Turn M.C. to switch to Yes. Pause (pause) 3 Song number indicator Selecting the desired text information
3 Press M.C. to select. 4 Shuffle indicator
A message will appear asking if you want to 1 Press M.C. to pause or resume. 5 PLAY/PAUSE indicator % Press /DISP.
save the database information to a USB stor- 6 S.Rtrv indicator
age device/SD card. Sound Retriever (sound retriever) Appears when Sound Retriever function is
4 Turn M.C. to switch to Yes.
Creating a new Pandora station
Automatically enhances compressed audio and on.
5 Press M.C. to select. 7 Song time (progress bar) You can create a new station in the Pandora
restores rich sound.
Select No to cancel the selection. 8 Play time indicator source based on the tagged information.
1 Press M.C. to select the desired setting.
! The database information on this unit will be 1—2—OFF (off)
deleted if ACC is set to OFF. Saving the data- Playing songs on an iPod
1 Press and hold /DISP.
1 is effective for low compression rates, and 2
base information to a USB storage device/SD is effective for high compression rates. 1 Connect an iPod to the USB cable.
card will allow it to be read from the USB stor- 2 Turn M.C. to select the desired setting.
Selecting a track (chapter) Track (from track)—Artist (from artist)
age device/SD card to which it was saved
1 Turn LEVER.
when ACC is set to ON, which will increase the
processing speed.
iPod 3 Press M.C. to select.
Fast forwarding or reversing
! The database may need to be rebuilt if the in- 1 Turn and hold down LEVER to the right or left.
Switches to the Pandora source and displays
Basic operations the list of Pandora stations.
formation in the USB storage device/SD card
file is different from the database information DEH-X9650BT/DEH-X8650BT Selecting an album
1 Press UP or DOWN. 4 Turn M.C. to select the desired station.
saved to the USB storage device/SD card. A 1 2 3 4
message will appear in such cases asking
whether to rebuild the database or not. Notes 5 Press M.C. to select.
! The iPod cannot be turned on or off when the A new station is created.
Play mode (repeat play)
control mode is set to Ctrl Audio.
Note
! Disconnect headphones from the iPod be-
1 Press M.C. to select a repeat play range. This function is disabled when there is no
5 6 7 8 fore connecting it to this unit.
CD/CD-R/CD-RW tagged information available.
! The iPod will turn off about two minutes after
! Disc repeat – Repeat all tracks
the ignition is switched off.
! Track repeat – Repeat the current track Browsing for a song
! Folder repeat – Repeat the current folder
External storage device (USB, SD) 1 Press (list) to switch to the top menu
! All repeat – Repeat all files of the list search.
! Track repeat – Repeat the current file
! Folder repeat – Repeat the current folder
En 9
<QRD3230-A>9
Black plate (10,1)
Section
2 Use M.C. to select a category/song. 2 Turn M.C. to change the mode; press to — Fast forward/reverse
select. — Selecting a song (chapter) 1 Press M.C. to turn shuffle all on.
Changing the name of the song or category ! Artist – Plays an album by the artist currently ! The volume can only be adjusted from this To turn off Shuffle all, select Shuffle OFF in
1 Turn M.C. playing. unit. Shuffle mode. For details, refer to
Playlists (playlists)—Artists (artists)—Albums ! Album – Plays a song from the album cur- Shuffle mode (shuffle) on page 10.
(albums)—Songs (songs)—Podcasts (pod- rently being played. Function settings Link play (link play)
casts)—Genres (genres)—Composers (com- ! Genre – Plays an album from the genre cur-
rently being played. 1 Press M.C. to display the main menu.
posers)—Audiobooks (audiobooks) 1 Press M.C. to display the setting mode.
The selected song/album will be played after the 2 Turn M.C. to change the mode; press to select.
Playing
currently playing song. 2 Turn M.C. to change the menu option
1 When a song is selected, press M.C. and press to select FUNCTION. For details about the settings, refer to Playing
Notes songs related to the currently playing song on
Viewing a list of songs in the selected category page 10.
1 When a category is selected, press M.C. ! The selected song/album may be canceled if 3 Turn M.C. to select the function.
you use functions other than link search (e.g. Once selected, the following functions can be Pause (pause)
Playing a song in the selected category fast forward and reverse). adjusted.
1 When a category is selected, press and hold ! Depending on the song selected to play, the ! Play mode, Shuffle mode, Shuffle all, 1 Press M.C. to pause or resume.
M.C. end of the currently playing song and the be- Link play and Audiobooks are not available
Audiobooks (audiobook speed)
ginning of the selected song/album may be when Ctrl iPod is selected in the control
Searching the list by alphabet
cut off. mode. For details, refer to Using this unit’s
1 When a list for the selected category is dis- 1 Press M.C. to select the desired setting.
iPod function from your iPod on page 10.
played, press to switch to alphabet search ! Faster – Playback at a speed faster than
mode. Using this unit’s iPod function normal
from your iPod Play mode (repeat play) ! Normal – Playback at normal speed
2 Turn M.C. to select a letter.
3 Press M.C. to display the alphabetical list. This unit’s iPod function can be controlled by ! Slower – Playback at a speed slower than
1 Press M.C. to select a repeat play range.
! To cancel searching, press /DISP. using the connected iPod. normal
! Repeat One – Repeat the current song
Ctrl iPod is not compatible with the following ! Repeat All – Repeat all songs in the se- Sound Retriever (sound retriever)
Notes iPod models. lected list
! You can play playlists created with the com- ! iPod nano 1st generation ! When the control mode is set to Ctrl iPod, the 1 Press M.C. to select the desired setting.
puter application (MusicSphere). The appli- ! iPod with video repeat play range will be same as what is set 1—2—OFF (off)
cation will be available on our website. for the connected iPod. 1 is effective for low compression rates, and 2
! Playlists that you created with the computer % Press BAND/ to switch the control is effective for high compression rates.
application (MusicSphere) are displayed in mode. Shuffle mode (shuffle)
abbreviated form. ! Ctrl iPod – This unit’s iPod function can be
operated from the connected iPod. 1 Press M.C. to select the desired setting.
! Ctrl Audio – This unit’s iPod function can be ! Shuffle Songs – Play back songs in the se- Using Bluetooth wireless
Playing songs related to the
currently playing song controlled by using this unit. lected list in random order. technology
! Shuffle Albums – Play back songs from a
You can play songs from the following lists. Notes Only for DEH-X9650BT and DEH-X8650BT
randomly selected album in order.
• Album list of the currently playing artist ! Switching the control mode to Ctrl iPod ! Shuffle OFF – Cancel random play.
• Song list of the currently playing album pauses song playback. Use the iPod to re- Using the Bluetooth telephone
Shuffle all (shuffle all)
• Album list of the currently playing genre sume playback. Important
! The following operations are still accessible ! Leaving the unit on standby to connect to
1 Press and hold to switch to link play from the unit even if the control mode is set your phone via Bluetooth while the engine is
mode. to Ctrl iPod. not running can drain the battery.
— Pausing
10 En
<QRD3230-A>10
Black plate (11,1)
Section
English
! Advanced operations that require attention 2 Turn M.C. to select the name of a device you
! When private mode is on, this function is not Connected devices may not work properly if
such as dialing numbers on the monitor, want to delete.
available. more than one Bluetooth device is connected at
using the phone book, etc., are prohibited ! Press and hold M.C. to swap between the
a time (e.g. a phone and a separate audio player Bluetooth device address and the device
while driving. Be sure to park your vehicle in Turning private mode on or off
are connected simultaneously).
a safe place and apply the parking brake be- 1 Press BAND/ while talking on the phone. name.
fore proceeding. 3 Press M.C. to display Delete YES.
Note 1 Press and hold to display the connec- 4 Press M.C. to delete the device information
If private mode is selected on the cellular phone, tion menu. from the device list.
Setting up for hands-free phoning # You cannot perform this step during a call.
hands-free phoning may not be available. ! When no device is selected in the device list,
this function is not available.
1 Connection 2 Turn M.C. to select the function. ! While this function is in use, do not turn off
Using voice recognition Once selected, the following functions can be
Use the Bluetooth telephone connection the engine.
This feature can be used on an iPhone equipped adjusted.
menu. Refer to Connection menu operation on
with voice recognition that is connected by Add device (connecting a new device)
page 11.
Bluetooth. Device list (connecting or disconnecting a device
2 Function settings
Use the Bluetooth telephone function menu. from the device list)
1 Press and hold M.C. to switch to voice
Refer to Phone menu operation on page 12.
recognition mode. 1 Press M.C. to display the setting mode.
2 Turn M.C. to select the name of a device you
2 Press M.C. and then talk into the micro- want to connect/disconnect.
Basic operations
phone to input voice commands. ! Press and hold M.C. to swap between the
To end voice recognition mode, press BAND/ . Bluetooth device address and the device
Making a phone call
name.
Refer to Phone menu operation on page 12. Notes
3 Press M.C. to connect/disconnect the selected
Answering an incoming call ! For details on voice recognition features,
device.
1 When a call is received, press . check the manual for your iPhone.
Once the connection is established, Con-
! In order for your voice commands to be rec-
nected is displayed.
Ending a call ognized and interpreted correctly, ensure
! When no device is selected in the device list,
1 Press . that conditions are suitable for recognition.
this function is not available.
Rejecting an incoming call ! Please note that wind blowing through the
vehicle windows and noise coming from out- Delete device (deleting a device from the device
1 When a call is received, press and hold .
side the vehicle can interfere with voice com- list)
Answering a call waiting mand operation.
1 When a call is received, press . ! For optimum pick-up, the microphone should
Switching between callers on hold be placed directly in front of the driver at a
1 Press M.C. suitable distance.
! Speaking too soon after the start of the com-
Canceling call waiting mand may cause voice recognition to fail.
1 Press and hold . ! Speak slowly, deliberately, and clearly.
En 11
<QRD3230-A>11
Black plate (12,1)
Section
Bluetooth visibility can be turned on so that other Phone menu operation Function and operation
1 Press M.C. to start searching.
devices can discover the unit. 1 Press to display the phone menu. 1 Display Phone Function.
! To cancel, press M.C. while searching.
1 Press M.C. to turn the visibility of this unit on Refer to Phone Function (phone function) on
! If this unit fails to find any available cellular
or off. 2 Turn M.C. to select the function. page 12.
phones, Not found is displayed.
2 Turn M.C. to select a device from the device Pin code input (PIN code input) Once selected, the following functions can be
list. adjusted. 2 Press M.C. to display the function menu.
You must enter a PIN code on your device to con-
! If the desired device is not displayed, select
firm the Bluetooth connection. The default code is Missed calls (missed call history) 3 Turn M.C. to select the function.
RE-SEARCH.
0000, but you can change it with this function. Once selected, the following functions can be
! Press and hold M.C. to swap between the Dialled calls (dialed call history)
1 Press M.C. to display the setting mode. Received calls (received call history) adjusted.
Bluetooth device address and the device
2 Turn M.C. to select a number.
name.
3 Press M.C. to move the cursor to the next posi- 1 Press M.C. to display the phone number list.
3 Press M.C. to connect the selected device. Auto answer (automatic answering)
tion. 2 Turn M.C. to select a name or phone number.
! To complete the connection, check the de-
4 After inputting PIN code, press and hold M.C. 3 Press M.C. to make a call. 1 Press M.C. to turn automatic answering on or
vice name (Pioneer BT Unit). Enter the
! After inputting, pressing M.C. returns you ! To display details about the contact you se- off.
PIN code on your device if necessary.
to the PIN code input display, and you can lected, press and hold M.C.
! PIN code is set to 0000 as the default. You Ring tone (ring tone select)
change the PIN code.
can change this code. PhoneBook (phone book)
! A 6-digit number may display on both this Device INFO (Bluetooth device address display) 1 Press M.C. to turn the ring tone on or off.
unit and the Bluetooth device. The contacts on your phone will normally be trans-
Select yes if the 6-digit numbers displayed 1 Press M.C. to display the setting mode. ferred automatically when the phone is con- PH.B.Name view (phone book name view)
on this unit and the Bluetooth device are 2 Press M.C. to select the desired setting. nected. If it is not, use your phone menu to
the same. Device name—Bluetooth device address transfer the contacts. The visibility of this unit 1 Press M.C. to invert the order of names in the
! 6-digit number appears on the display of should be on when you use the phone menu. phone book.
Guest Mode (guest mode) Refer to Visibility (setting the visibility of this unit)
this unit. Once the connection is estab-
lished, this number disappears. When this mode is turned on, if a pairing is at- on page 12.
Bluetooth Audio
! If you are unable to complete the connec- tempted while there are already three devices 1 Press M.C. to display ABC Search (alphabeti-
cal list). Important
tion using this unit, use the device to con- paired together, the unit will move to the Delete
nect to the unit. device screen automatically and prompt you to 2 Turn M.C. to select the first letter of the name ! Depending on the Bluetooth audio player
! If three devices are already paired, Device delete a device. For details, refer to Delete device you are looking for. connected to this unit, the available opera-
Full is displayed and it is not possible to (deleting a device from the device list) on page 11. 3 Press M.C. to display a registered name list. tions will be limited to the following two lev-
perform this operation. In this case, delete 1 Press M.C. to turn the guest mode on or off. 4 Turn M.C. to select the name you are looking els:
a paired device first. for. — A2DP profile (Advanced Audio Distribution
Auto pairing (auto pairing) 5 Press M.C. to display the phone number list. Profile): You can only playback songs on your
Auto connect (connecting to a Bluetooth device 6 Turn M.C. to select a phone number you want audio player.
If this function is turned on while there is an
automatically) to call. The A2DP connection can only be used with
iPhone connected to the unit by USB, you will be
automatically prompted to pair the unit and 7 Press M.C. to make a call. Pandora (smartphone), App (smartphone)
1 Press M.C. to turn automatic connection on or and BT Audio.
iPhone. Phone Function (phone function)
off. — AVRCP profile (Audio/Video Remote Control
1 Press M.C. to turn auto pairing on or off.
Visibility (setting the visibility of this unit) ! This function may not be available depending You can set Auto answer, Ring tone and PH.B. Profile): You can perform playback, pause
on what version of iOS you are using. Name view from this menu. For details, refer to playback, select songs, etc.
! This function cannot be used with USB port 2. Function and operation on page 12. ! To use a Bluetooth audio player with this
unit, refer to this manual and the manual for
your device for operating instructions.
12 En
<QRD3230-A>12
Black plate (13,1)
Section
! As the signal from your cellular phone may 3 PLAY/PAUSE indicator ! If the Data Plan for your iPhone does not provide
cause noise, avoid using it when you are lis- 4 S.Rtrv indicator 1 Press M.C. to turn random play on or off. for unlimited data usage, additional charges
English
tening to songs on your Bluetooth audio Appears when Sound Retriever function is ! This function may not be available depend- from your carrier may apply for accessing the
player. on. ing on the type of Bluetooth audio player Pandora service via 3G and/or EDGE networks.
! The sound of the Bluetooth audio player will 5 Song time (progress bar) connected. ! You need to connect to the Internet via 3G, EDGE
be muted when the phone is in use. 6 Play time indicator ! The random play range varies depending or Wi-Fi network to use the service from Pandora.
! When the Bluetooth audio player is in use, on the Bluetooth audio player in use.
you cannot connect to a Bluetooth telephone Fast forwarding or reversing Limitations:
Repeat (repeat play)
automatically. 1 Turn and hold down LEVER to the right or left. ! Depending on the availability to the Internet, you
! Playback continues even if you switch from 1 Press M.C. to select a repeat play range. may not be able to receive Pandora service.
Selecting a track
your Bluetooth audio player to another ! This function may not be available depend- ! Pandora service is subject to change without no-
1 Turn LEVER.
source while listening to a song. ing on the type of Bluetooth audio player tice. The service could be affected by any of the
! Depending on the type of Bluetooth audio Pausing and starting playback connected. following: firmware versions of iPhone, firmware
player you have connected to this unit, oper- 1 Press BAND/ . ! The repeat play range varies depending on versions of Pandora application, changes to the
ation and information display may not be the Bluetooth audio player in use. Pandora music service.
available for some functions. ! Certain functions of the Pandora service are not
Switching the display Sound Retriever (sound retriever) available when accessing the service through the
Setting up for Bluetooth audio Selecting the desired text information Pioneer car audio/video products. They include,
1 Press M.C. to select the desired setting.
but not limited to the following: creating new sta-
Before you can use the Bluetooth audio function 1—2—OFF (off)
you must set up the unit for use with your % Press /DISP. tions, deleting stations, sending information
1 is effective for low compression rates, and 2
about current stations, buying tracks from
Bluetooth audio player. You will need to pair this is effective for high compression rates.
iTunes, viewing additional text information, log-
unit with your Bluetooth audio player. Function settings
ging in to Pandora, adjusting Cell Network Audio
1 Press M.C. to display the main menu. Quality.
1 Connection Streaming Pandoraâ Pandora internet radio is a music service not af-
Use the Bluetooth telephone connection 2 Turn M.C. to change the menu option filiated with Pioneer. More information is avail-
IMPORTANT:
menu. Refer to Connection menu operation on and press to select FUNCTION. able at http://www.pandora.com.
page 11.
Requirements to access Pandora using the
The Pandora mobile application is available for
Pioneer car audio/video products:
3 Turn M.C. to select the function. most iPhone and smartphone, please visit
! The service from Pandora is currently only avail-
Once selected, the following functions can be www.pandora.com/everywhere/mobile for the
Basic operations able in Australia and New Zealand.
adjusted. latest compatibility information.
! Please update the firmware of the Pandora appli-
1 2 Play (play)
cation to the latest version before use.
Starting procedure for iPhone users
! The latest version of the Pandora application can
be downloaded on iTunes App Store and Google 1 Connect an iPhone to USB cable.
1 Press M.C. to start playback.
Play.
Stop (stop) ! Create a free or a paid account online. You can 2 Select Wired in APP CONNECT MODE. For
create the account in the Pandora application details, refer to APP CONNECT MODE (APP
3 4 5 6 1 Press M.C. to stop the playback. from your iPhone or on the website. The URL in connect mode setting) on page 19.
the following: If using DEH-X9650SD and DEH-X7650SD, pro-
Pause (pause)
1 Device name http://www.pandora.com/register ceed to the next step.
Shows the device name of the connected 1 Press M.C. to pause or resume.
Bluetooth audio player. 3 Switch the source to Pandora.
2 Track number indicator Random (random play)
En 13
<QRD3230-A>13
Black plate (14,1)
Section
4 Start up the application on the iPhone 3 PLAY/PAUSE indicator 2 Use M.C. to select the Shuffle or desired
A new station will be created from the information
and initiate playback. 4 S.Rtrv indicator station.
for the selected artist, track, or genre.
Appears when Sound Retriever function is
1 Press M.C. to display the setting mode.
Starting procedure for on. Changing the sort order
2 Turn M.C. to select the desired setting.
smartphone users 5 Song time (progress bar) 1 Press (list).
From Track (from track)—From Artist (from
6 Play time indicator ! ABC – You can sort the items in the list alpha-
Only for DEH-X9650BT and DEH-X8650BT artist)—From Genre (from genre)
betically
3 Press M.C. to select.
Playing tracks ! DATE – You can sort the items in the list in
1 Connect your smartphone to this unit Selecting From Track or From Artist creates a
For details, refer to Starting procedure for iPhone order of the dates on which the items were
using Bluetooth wireless technology. For de- new station.
users on page 13 or Starting procedure for smart- created
tails, refer to Connection menu operation on If selecting From Genre, complete the proce-
phone users on page 14.
page 11. Changing Shuffle or stations dures outlined below.
Skipping tracks 1 Turn M.C. 4 Turn M.C. to select a genre.
2 Select Bluetooth in APP CONNECT MODE. 1 Turn LEVER to the right. 5 Press M.C. to select.
Playing
For details, refer to APP CONNECT MODE 6 Turn M.C. to select a station.
Pausing playback 1 When Shuffle or the station is selected, press
(APP connect mode setting) on page 19. 7 Press M.C. to select.
1 Press BAND/ to pause or resume. M.C.
A new station is created.
3 Switch the source to Pandora. Giving a Thumbs Up Deleting stations ! You can also switch to New station by press-
The smartphone application will start up auto- 1 Press UP to give a “Thumbs Up” for the track 1 When station is selected, press and hold M.C. ing and holding .
matically. If it fails to start, follow the instruc- currently playing. DELETE YES appears.
Pause (pause)
tions on the screen to attempt to resolve the To cancel, press /DISP. You will return to the
Giving a Thumbs Down
problem. previous level. 1 Press M.C. to pause or resume.
1 Press DOWN to give a “Thumbs Down” for the
2 Press M.C.
track currently playing and to skip to the next Sound Retriever (sound retriever)
Basic operations track.
The station will be deleted.
14 En
<QRD3230-A>14
Black plate (15,1)
Section
For details about Android device compatibil- 4 Start up the application on the smart- Function settings
Important
ity with this unit, refer to the information on phone and initiate playback.
English
Use of third party apps may involve or require our website. 1 Press M.C. to display the main menu.
the provision of personally identifiable infor- Basic operations
mation, whether through the creation of a Notes 2 Turn M.C. to change the menu option
user account or otherwise, and for certain ap- ! Please check our website for a list of sup- DEH-X9650BT/DEH-X8650BT and press to select FUNCTION.
plications, the provision of geolocation data. ported iPhone or smartphone applications 1
ALL THIRD PARTY APPS ARE THE SOLE RE- for this unit. 3 Turn M.C. to select the function.
SPONSIBILITY OF THE PROVIDERS, INCLUD- ! Pioneer is not liable for any issues that may Once selected, the following functions can be
ING WITHOUT LIMITATION COLLECTION AND arise from incorrect or flawed app-based adjusted.
SECURITY OF USER DATA AND PRIVACY content.
PRACTICES. BY ACCESSING THIRD PARTY ! The content and functionality of the sup- Pause (pause)
APPS, YOU AGREE TO REVIEW THE TERMS ported applications are the responsibility of 2 3 4 5
OF SERVICE AND PRIVACY POLICIES OF THE the App providers. 1 Press M.C. to pause or resume.
PROVIDERS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH DEH-X9650SD/DEH-X7650SD
Sound Retriever (sound retriever)
THE TERMS OR POLICIES OF ANY PROVIDER Starting procedure for iPhone users 1
OR DO NOT CONSENT TO THE USE OF GEO-
1 Connect an iPhone to USB cable. 1 Press M.C. to select the desired setting.
LOCATION DATA WHERE APPLICABLE, DO
1—2—OFF (off)
NOT USE THAT THIRD PARTY APP.
2 Select Wired in APP CONNECT MODE. For 1 is effective for low compression rates, and 2
details, refer to APP CONNECT MODE (APP is effective for high compression rates.
En 15
<QRD3230-A>15
Black plate (16,1)
Section
16 En
<QRD3230-A>16
Black plate (17,1)
Section
Note
Key Side (key section color setting) ILLUMI FX (illumination effect mode) SHORT PLAYBACK (short playback mode)
You cannot create a custom illumination color
English
You can select desired colors for the keys of this When this mode is enabled, an illumination effect while Scan is selected. You can select the length of the playback time.
unit. with lights that slowly fade in and out in a set pat- 1 Press M.C. to display the setting mode.
1 Press M.C. to display the setting mode. tern will appear on the display and keys to signify 2 Turn M.C. to select the desired setting.
2 Turn M.C. to select the desired setting. changes. About MIXTRAX 1.0 MIN (1.0 minute)—1.5 MIN (1.5 minutes)—
! Preset colors (ranging from White to Blue) 1 Press M.C. to turn ILLUMI FX on or off. 2.0 MIN (2.0 minutes)—2.5 MIN (2.5 minutes)
MIXTRAX technology is used to insert a variety
! Scan (cycle through a variety of colors au- ! The illumination effect will activate when the —3.0 MIN (3.0 minutes)—Random (random)
of sound effects in between songs, allowing you
tomatically) ACC power is turned on/off regardless of —OFF (off)
to experience your music as a nonstop mix com-
! Custom (customized illumination color) whether the ILLUMI FX setting is on or off. plete with visual effects. FLASH AREA (flash area)
Display Side (display section color setting)
Note Notes You can select areas for flashing colors.
You can select the desired colors for the display of When Custom is selected, the customized color ! Depending on the file/song, sound effects 1 Press M.C. to display the setting mode.
this unit. saved is selected. may not be available. 2 Turn M.C. to select the desired setting.
1 Press M.C. to display the setting mode. ! Turn MIXTRAX off if the visual effects it pro- Key & Display (key and display)—KEY SIDE
2 Turn M.C. to select the desired setting. duces have adverse effects on driving. Refer (key section)—OFF (off)
! Preset colors (ranging from White to Blue) Customizing the to Operations using the MIXTRAX button on ! When OFF is selected, the color set under IL-
! Scan (cycle through a variety of colors au- page 7. LUMINATION is used as the display color.
illumination color
tomatically)
You can create custom illumination colors for Flashing Color (flash pattern)
! Custom (customized illumination color) MIXTRAX menu
both Key Side and Display Side. The flashing color and MIXTRAX special effects
Key & Display (key and display color setting)
display change with changes in the sound and
You can select the desired colors for the keys and 1 Press M.C. to display the main menu. bass levels.
display of this unit. 1 Press M.C. to display the setting mode.
1 Press M.C. to display the setting mode. 2 Turn M.C. to display ILLUMINATION and 2 Turn M.C. to select the desired setting.
2 Turn M.C. to select the desired setting. press to select. ! Sound Level Mode Color 1 to Color 6 –
! Preset colors (ranging from White to Blue) 1 Press M.C. to display the main menu. The flash pattern changes according to the
! Scan (cycle through a variety of colors au- 3 Turn M.C. to display Key Side or sound level. Select a desired mode.
tomatically) Display Side. Press to select. 2 Turn M.C. to change the menu option ! Low Pass Mode Color 1 to Color 6 – The
and press to select MIXTRAX. flash pattern changes according to the
Phone (phone color setting)
4 Press M.C. and hold until the customizing bass level. Select a desired mode.
You can select the desired key colors to display illumination color setting appears in the dis- 3 Turn M.C. to select the MIXTRAX func- ! Flashing Color Random – The flash pat-
when an incoming call is received. play. tion. tern changes randomly according to the
1 Press M.C. to display the setting mode. Once selected, the following MIXTRAX functions sound level mode and low pass mode.
2 Turn M.C. to select the desired setting. 5 Press M.C. to select the primary color. can be adjusted. The function is enabled when ! Sound Level Mode Random – The flash
! Flashing – The color selected from Key R (red)—G (green)—B (blue) MIXTRAX is on. pattern changes randomly according to the
Side flashes. sound level mode.
! Flash FX 1 to Flash FX 6 – The system auto- 6 Turn M.C. to adjust the brightness level. ! Low Pass Mode Random – The flash pat-
matically cycles through all available key Adjustment range: 0 to 60 tern changes randomly according to the
colors for this unit. Select the desired # You cannot select a level below 20 for all three of low pass mode.
mode. R (red), G (green), and B (blue) at the same time.
DISP EFFECT (display effect)
! OFF – No change in key color made when # You can also perform the same operation on
incoming calls are received. other colors.
En 17
<QRD3230-A>17
Black plate (18,1)
Section
The MIXTRAX special effects display can be turned MIX Fixed (MIXTRAX sound effects) System menu Clock (clock display setting)
on or off.
The fixed sounds can be removed from MIXTRAX You can set the clock to display even if the unit is
1 Press M.C. to display the setting mode.
sound effects. turned off.
2 Turn M.C. to select the desired setting.
1 Press M.C. to select the desired setting. 1 Press M.C. to select the desired setting.
MIXTRAX 1 (MIXTRAX special effects dis-
ON (fixed sounds and sound effects)—OFF ON (clock display)—Elapsed time (elapsed
play 1)—MIXTRAX 2 (MIXTRAX special effects
(sound effects) time display)—OFF (clock off)
display 2)—OFF (normal display) 1 Press M.C. to display the main menu. ! Only for DEH-X9650SD
LOOP EFFECT (loop effect)
CUT IN EFFECT (manual cut-in effect) You can switch the function by pressing CLK.
2 Turn M.C. to change the menu option
The loop effect, which is inserted at the end of
You can turn on or off the MIXTRAX sound effects and press to select SYSTEM. Auto PI (auto PI seek)
each song automatically, can be removed from
while manually changing tracks.
the sound effect. The unit can automatically search for a different
1 Press M.C. to select the desired setting. 3 Turn M.C. to select the system menu
1 Press M.C. to select the desired setting. station with the same programming, even during
ON (on)—OFF (off) function.
ON (on)—OFF (off) preset recall.
Once selected, the following system menu func-
MIX Settings (MIXTRAX settings) 1 Press M.C. to turn Auto PI seek on or off.
Flanger EFFECT (flanger effect) tions can be adjusted.
For details, refer to MIXTRAX settings on page 18. ! BT AUDIO, Clear memory, BT Version Info. Warning tone (warning tone setting)
The flanger effect can be removed from the sound and APP CONNECT MODE are not available
effect. If the front panel is not detached from the head
Note for DEH-X9650SD and DEH-X7650SD.
1 Press M.C. to select the desired setting. unit within four seconds of turning off the ignition,
SHORT PLAYBACK, CUT IN EFFECT, and ON (on)—OFF (off) a warning tone sounds. You can turn off the warn-
Language select (multi-language)
MIX Settings are disabled while the MIXTRAX ing tone.
App is in use with the source set to App. The Echo EFFECT (echo effect) 1 Press M.C. to turn the warning tone on or off.
1 Press M.C. to select the language.
MIXTRAX App settings are given priority over The echo effect can be removed from the sound ef- English—Español—Português—ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ AUX (auxiliary input)
other settings. fect. —
1 Press M.C. to select the desired setting. Activate this setting when using an auxiliary de-
ON (on)—OFF (off) Calendar (setting the date) vice connected to this unit.
MIXTRAX settings
1 Press M.C. to turn AUX on or off.
You can change the settings for fixed sounds Crush EFFECT (crush effect) 1 Press M.C. to select the segment of the calen-
and sound effects. dar display you wish to set. BRIGHTNESS (brightness adjustment)
! The fixed sound settings can be changed The crush effect can be removed from the sound
Year—Day—Month You can use this setting to adjust the display
from MIX Fixed. effect.
2 Turn M.C. to set the date. brightness.
! The sound effect settings can be changed 1 Press M.C. to select the desired setting.
ON (on)—OFF (off) Clock Setting (setting the clock) 1 Press M.C. to display the setting mode.
from any of the following menus:
2 Turn M.C. to select the desired setting.
LOOP EFFECT, Flanger EFFECT, Crossfade EFFECT (crossfade effect)
1 Press M.C. to select the segment of the clock Adjustment range: 5 to 1
Echo EFFECT, Crush EFFECT, and
The crossfade effect can be removed from the display you wish to set. Contrast (display contrast setting)
Crossfade EFFECT.
sound effect. Hour—Minute—Time notation
1 Press M.C. to select the desired setting. 2 Turn M.C. to adjust the clock. 1 Press M.C. to display the setting mode.
1 Display MIX Settings.
ON (on)—OFF (off) EngineTime alert (elapsed time display setting) 2 Turn M.C. to adjust the contrast level.
2 Press M.C. to display the function menu. 0 to 15 is displayed as the level is increased or
Note This setting displays how much time has elapsed decreased.
since the machine was turned on.
3 Turn M.C. to select the function. Flanger EFFECT, Crush EFFECT and Ever-scroll (scroll mode setting)
You can set a timer and an alarm.
Once selected, the following functions can be Crossfade EFFECT are not available when iPod
1 Press M.C. to select the desired setting.
adjusted. is selected as the source.
OFF—15Minutes—30Minutes
18 En
<QRD3230-A>18
Black plate (19,1)
Section
English
mation scrolls continuously in the display. Set to ting) and RCA rear output) can be used for full-range
For details, refer to System menu on page 18.
OFF if you prefer the information to scroll just speaker (Rear SP :F.Range) or subwoofer (Rear
Select an appropriate option for your connected
once. SP :S/W) connection. If you switch the rear output
device.
1 Press M.C. to turn the ever scroll on or off.
1 Press M.C. to select the desired setting.
setting to Rear SP :S/W, you can connect a rear Using an AUX source
speaker lead directly to a subwoofer without using
BT AUDIO (Bluetooth audio activation) Wired (for iPhone)—Bluetooth (for smart- 1 Insert the stereo mini plug into the AUX
an auxiliary amp.
phone) input jack.
You need to activate the BT Audio source in order 1 Press M.C. to switch the rear output setting.
! This setting is not available when the source is
to use a Bluetooth audio player. ! When no subwoofer is connected to the
set to Pandora or App. 2 Press SRC/OFF to select AUX as the
1 Press M.C. to turn the BT Audio source on or rear output, select Rear SP :F.Range (full-
source.
off. range speaker).
! When a subwoofer is connected to the rear Note
PANDORA (Pandora activation) Set up menu output, select Rear SP :S/W (subwoofer). AUX cannot be selected unless the auxiliary set-
Turn Pandora source on to use it. Pandora will 1 Press and hold SRC/OFF until the unit ! Even if you change this setting, there will be ting is turned on. For more details, refer to AUX
not show up on the list of available sources while turns off. no output unless you turn the subwoofer out- (auxiliary input) on page 18.
it is turned off. put on (refer to Subwoofer1 (subwoofer on/off
1 Press M.C. to turn the Pandora source on or 2 Press M.C. to display the main menu. setting) on page 16).
off. ! If you change this setting, subwoofer output in Turning the display off or on
3 Turn M.C. to change the menu option the audio menu will return to the factory set-
Clear memory (clearing the Bluetooth device % Press and hold MIX/DISP OFF until the
and press to select SETUP. tings.
data stored on this unit) display turns on or off.
! Both rear speaker lead outputs and RCA rear
Bluetooth device data stored on this unit can be 4 Turn M.C. to select the set up menu func- output are switched simultaneously in this set-
cleared. To protect your personal information, tion. ting. If an unwanted display appears
clear the device memory before you pass the unit Once selected, the following set up menu func-
Software Update (updating the software) Turn off the unwanted display using the proce-
on to someone else. The following information will tions can be adjusted.
dures listed below.
be deleted. ! Software Update is not available for DEH- This function is used to update this unit with the
Device list/PIN code/call history/phone book X9650SD and DEH-X7650SD. latest Bluetooth software. For about Bluetooth
1 Press M.C. to display the main menu.
1 Press M.C. to show the confirmation display. software and updating, refer to our website.
Clear memory YES is displayed. Clearing FM step (FM tuning step) ! Never turn the unit off while the Bluetooth soft- 2 Turn M.C. to change the menu option
memory is now on standby. ware is being updated. and press to select SYSTEM.
If you do not want to clear the Bluetooth device 1 Press M.C. to select the FM tuning step. 1 Press M.C. to start updating.
data stored on this unit, turn M.C. to display 100kHz (100 kHz)—50kHz (50 kHz) Follow the on-screen instructions to finish up- 3 Turn M.C. to display DEMO OFF and press
Cancel and press it again to select. dating the Bluetooth software. to select.
AM step (AM tuning step)
2 Press M.C. to clear the memory.
Cleared is displayed and the Bluetooth device 1 Press M.C. to select the AM tuning step. 4 Turn M.C. to switch to YES.
data is cleared. 9kHz (9 kHz)—10kHz (10 kHz) System menu
! While this function is in use, do not turn off 5 Press M.C. to select.
the engine. S/W control (rear output and subwoofer setting) 1 Press and hold SRC/OFF until the unit
turns off.
BT Version Info. (Bluetooth version display)
2 Press M.C. to display the main menu.
You can display the system versions of this unit
and of Bluetooth module.
3 Turn M.C. to change the menu option
1 Press M.C. to display the information. and press to select SYSTEM.
En 19
<QRD3230-A>19
Black plate (20,1)
Section
03 Installation Installation
Connections ! Use this unit with a 12-volt battery and nega- This unit Power cord
tive grounding only. Failure to do so may re- Perform these connections when not connect-
sult in a fire or malfunction. 6
WARNING ing a rear speaker lead to a subwoofer.
! To prevent a short-circuit, overheating or mal-
! Use speakers over 50 W (output value) and
function, be sure to follow the directions 1 23 45 7 8
between 4 W to 8 W (impedance value). Do L 1 R
below.
not use 1 W to 3 W speakers for this unit. 2 3
— Disconnect the negative terminal of the bat-
! The black cable is ground. When installing 4
tery before installation. 6 8
this unit or power amp (sold separately), F 7 9
— Secure the wiring with cable clamps or adhe-
make sure to connect the ground wire first. ba 9
sive tape. Wrap adhesive tape around wiring
Ensure that the ground wire is properly con-
that comes into contact with metal parts to 5 a c
nected to metal parts of the car’s body. The R b d
protect the wiring.
ground wire of the power amp and the one of
— Place all cables away from moving parts, c
this unit or any other device must be con-
such as the shift lever and seat rails. e
nected to the car separately with different
— Place all cables away from hot places, such f
screws. If the screw for the ground wire loos-
as near the heater outlet. g
ens or falls out, it could result in fire, genera- h
— Do not connect the yellow cable to the battery 1 Antenna input 15 cm
tion of smoke or malfunction. i
by passing it through the hole to the engine 2 Fuse (10 A)
Ground wire POWER AMP compartment. 3 Power cord input Perform these connections when using a sub-
— Cover any disconnected cable connectors 4 Wired remote input woofer without the optional amplifier.
with insulating tape. Hard-wired remote control adapter can be
— Do not shorten any cables. connected (sold separately). 1
L R
— Never cut the insulation of the power cable of 5 Microphone input (DEH-X9650BT and DEH- 2 3
this unit in order to share the power with X8650BT only) 4
other devices. The current capacity of the 6 Microphone (DEH-X9650BT and DEH- 6 8
F 7 9
Other devices Metal parts of car’s body cable is limited.
(Another electronic
X8650BT only)
device in the car) — Use a fuse of the rating prescribed. 4m
j a c
— Never wire the negative speaker cable directly 7 Rear output
SW
b d
to ground. 8 Front output
— Never band together negative cables of multi- 9 Subwoofer output
Important e k
ple speakers. a USB port 2 (DEH-X9650BT and DEH-X9650SD
! When installing this unit in a vehicle without ! When this unit is on, control signals are sent only) f a c
an ACC (accessory) position on the ignition through the blue/white cable. Connect this g l m
b USB port 1 h
switch, failure to connect the red cable to the cable to the system remote control of an ex- b d
c USB cable 1.5 m i
terminal that detects operation of the ignition ternal power amp or the vehicle’s auto-anten-
key may result in battery drain. na relay control terminal (max. 300 mA 1 To power cord input
12 V DC). If the vehicle is equipped with a 2 Left
F O
glass antenna, connect it to the antenna 3 Right
OF
4 Front speaker
! Never connect the blue/white cable to the
T
5 Rear speaker
ACC position No ACC position power terminal of an external power amp. 6 White
Also, never connect it to the power terminal 7 White/black
of the auto antenna. Doing so may result in 8 Gray
battery drain or a malfunction.
20 En
<QRD3230-A>20
Black plate (21,1)
Section
Installation Installation 03
9 Gray/black Power amp (sold separately) ! The semiconductor laser will be damaged if 2 Secure the mounting sleeve by using a
a Green Perform these connections when using the op- it overheats. Install this unit away from hot screwdriver to bend the metal tabs (90°) into
English
b Green/black tional amplifier. places such as near the heater outlet. place.
c Violet ! Optimum performance is obtained when the
d Violet/black unit is installed at an angle of less than 60°. 1
1 3
e Black (chassis ground) 2
Connect to a clean, paint-free metal location.
4
60°
f Yellow 5 5
Connect to the constant 12 V supply termi- 3
nal. 2
1 2
g Red 6 ! When installing, to ensure proper heat dis-
Connect to terminal controlled by ignition 7 7 persal when using this unit, make sure you
switch (12 V DC). 1 Dashboard
3 leave ample space behind the rear panel and
h Blue/white wrap any loose cables so they are not block- 2 Mounting sleeve
Connect to system control terminal of the 1 2 # Make sure that the unit is installed securely in
8 ing the vents.
power amp or auto-antenna relay control ter- place. An unstable installation may cause skipping
9 9
minal (max. 300 mA 12 V DC). or other malfunctions.
i Orange/white
Connect to lighting switch terminal. 1 System remote control
DIN Rear-mount
j Subwoofer (4 W) Connect to Blue/white cable. Leave ample
space 5 cm
k When using a subwoofer of 70 W (2 W), be 2 Power amp (sold separately) 1 Determine the appropriate position
sure to connect the subwoofer to the violet 3 Connect with RCA cables (sold separately) where the holes on the bracket and the side
5 cm
and violet/black leads of this unit. Do not 4 To Rear output 5cm
cm
of the unit match.
connect anything to the green and green/ 5 Rear speaker
black leads. 6 To Front output
l Not used. 7 Front speaker
m Subwoofer (4 W) × 2 8 To subwoofer output DIN front/rear mount
9 Subwoofer This unit can be properly installed using either
Notes
! When using a two-speaker system, do not front-mount or rear-mount installation.
2 Tighten two screws on each side.
connect anything to speaker leads that are Installation Use commercially available parts when instal-
not connected to a speaker. ling.
Important
! Change the set up menu of this unit. Refer to 1
3
S/W control (rear output and subwoofer set- ! Check all connections and systems before DIN Front-mount
ting) on page 19. final installation.
The subwoofer output of this unit is monau- ! Do not use unauthorized parts as this may 1 Insert the mounting sleeve into the dash-
board. 2
ral. cause malfunctions.
! Consult your dealer if installation requires For installation in shallow spaces, use the sup-
drilling of holes or other modifications to the plied mounting sleeve. If there is enough space, 1 Truss screw (5 mm × 8 mm)
vehicle. use the mounting sleeve that came with the ve- 2 Mounting bracket
! Do not install this unit where: hicle. 3 Dashboard or console
— it may interfere with operation of the vehicle.
— it may cause injury to a passenger as a result
of a sudden stop.
En 21
<QRD3230-A>21
Black plate (22,1)
Section
03 Installation Installation
Notes 2
! Install the microphone in a position and ori-
entation that will enable it to pick up the
1 Trim ring voice of the person operating the system.
2 Notched tab ! Use separately sold clamps to secure the 1 Microphone clip
! Releasing the front panel allows easier ac- lead where necessary inside the vehicle. 1 Double-sided tape
cess to the trim ring.
When installing the microphone 2 Install the microphone on the rear side of the
! When reattaching the trim ring, point the
When installing the microphone on the steering column steering column.
side with the notched tab down.
on the sun visor
1 Detach the microphone base from the mi-
2 Insert the supplied extraction keys into 1 Fit the microphone lead into the groove.
Adjusting the microphone angle
crophone clip.
both sides of the unit until they click into To detach the microphone base from the micro-
place. phone clip, slide the microphone base.
1
3 Pull the unit out of the dashboard. 1
2
1 Microphone lead
3
2 Groove
22 En
<QRD3230-A>22
Black plate (23,1)
Appendix
English
Symptoms are written in bold and causes in reg- Do not use the cellular phone at this time. tion. The protected files are skipped.
ular, non-indented text. Regular, indented text is
A call was made with a Bluetooth connected cellular Switch to a device that does support voice
used to indicate actions to be taken.
phone and then immediately terminated. As a result, recognition. PROTECT
communication between this unit and the cellular All the files on the inserted disc are embedded with
The display automatically returns to the ordinary phone was not terminated properly. DRM.
display. Reconnect the Bluetooth connection between CD player Replace the disc.
this unit and the cellular phone.
You did not perform any operation within about 30 ERROR-07, 11, 12, 17, 30
seconds.
The Bluetooth device cannot be paired with this The disc is dirty.
Perform operation again. External storage device (USB, SD)/iPod
unit. Clean the disc.
The information for this unit registered to the The disc is scratched. NO DEVICE
The repeat play range changes unexpectedly.
Bluetooth device, or that for the Bluetooth device Replace the disc. No USB storage device or iPod is connected.
Depending on the repeat play range, the selected
registered to this unit, was deleted somehow. Connect a compatible USB storage device/iPod.
range may change when another folder or track is
Delete the information for this unit registered to ERROR-10, 11, 12, 15, 17, 30, A0
being selected or during fast forwarding/reversing.
the Bluetooth device and that for the Bluetooth FORMAT READ
Select the repeat play range again. There is an electrical or mechanical error.
device registered to this unit, if not deleted
Turn the ignition switch OFF and back ON, or Sometimes there is a delay between the start of play-
already. Then, try pairing the Bluetooth device to
A subfolder is not played back. switch to a different source, then back to the CD back and when you start to hear any sound.
this unit again.
player. Wait until the message disappears and you hear
Subfolders cannot be played when Folder repeat
sound.
(folder repeat) is selected.
ERROR-15
Select another repeat play range. Error messages The inserted disc is blank. NO AUDIO
NO XXXX appears when a display is changed When you contact your dealer or your nearest Replace the disc. There are no songs.
(NO TITLE, for example). Pioneer Service Center, be sure to note the error Transfer the audio files to the USB storage device
message. ERROR-23 and connect.
There is no embedded text information.
Error messages are written in bold and causes Unsupported CD format. The connected USB storage device has security en-
Switch the display or play another track/file.
in regular, non-indented text. Regular, indented Replace the disc. abled.
text is used to indicate actions to be taken. Follow the USB storage device instructions to
The unit is malfunctioning.
There is interference. FORMAT READ disable the security.
You are using a device, such as a cellular phone,
Common Sometimes there is a delay between the start of play-
back and when you start to hear any sound. SKIPPED
that may cause audible interference. AMP ERROR
Move electrical devices that may be causing the Wait until the message disappears and you hear The connected USB storage device contains DRM
This unit fails to operate or the speaker connection is
interference away from the unit. sound. protected files.
incorrect; the protective circuit is activated.
The protected files are skipped.
Check the speaker connection. If the message
The sound from the Bluetooth audio source is NO AUDIO
fails to disappear even after the engine is
not played back. The inserted disc does not contain any playable files. PROTECT
switched off/on, contact your dealer or an
There is a call in progress on a Bluetooth connected authorized Pioneer Service Station for Replace the disc. All the files on the connected USB storage device
cellular phone. assistance. are embedded with DRM.
The sound will be played back when the call is Replace the USB storage device.
terminated.
En 23
<QRD3230-A>23
Black plate (24,1)
Appendix
24 En
<QRD3230-A>24
Black plate (25,1)
Appendix
Start up Pandora. Press BAND key to retry. BT error. Press BAND key to retry.
The following types of discs cannot be used with When using discs that can be printed on label sur-
Connection to the Pandora application failed. Bluetooth connection failed. this unit: faces, check the instructions and the warnings of
English
Follow the instructions that appear on the Follow the instructions that appear on the ! DualDiscs the discs. Depending on the discs, inserting and
screen. screen. ! 8-cm discs: Attempts to use such discs with ejecting may not be possible. Using such discs
an adapter may cause the unit to malfunction. may result in damage to this equipment.
Disconnected.Press BAND key to retry. Check your App. Press BAND key to retry. ! Oddly shaped discs
Do not attach commercially available labels or
Bluetooth connection lost. Connection to the application failed. other materials to the discs.
Follow the instructions that appear on the Follow the instructions that appear on the ! The discs may warp making the disc unplay-
screen. screen.
! Discs other than CDs able.
! Damaged discs, including discs that are ! The labels may come off during playback and
Stations Full Can’t be Created Start up and play your Application. prevent ejection of the discs, which may result
cracked, chipped or warped
A new station cannot be added. The application has not started running yet. ! CD-R/RW discs that have not been finalized in damage to the equipment.
Delete an old station to open a spot for a new Follow the instructions that appear on the
one. screen. Do not touch the recorded surface of the discs.
Store discs in their cases when not in use. External storage device (USB, SD)
Can’t Be Deleted
Do not attach labels, write on or apply chemicals Do not leave the external storage device (USB, SD)
The station could not be deleted. Handling guidelines to the surface of the discs. in places with high temperatures.
Run the same command for another station.
Discs and player To clean a CD, wipe the disc with a soft cloth out- Depending on the external storage device (USB,
No Network ward from the center. SD), the following problems may occur.
Use only discs that feature either of the following ! Operations may vary.
The connected device is out of area. Condensation may temporarily impair the player’s
two logos. ! The storage device may not be recognized.
Connect the connected device to a network. performance. Let it rest for about one hour to ad-
just to a warmer temperature. Also, wipe any ! Files may not be played back properly.
No Service damp discs off with a soft cloth.
The connected device is out of area. Playback of discs may not be possible because of USB storage device
Connect the connected device to a network. disc characteristics, disc format, recorded applica-
tion, playback environment, storage conditions, Connections via USB hub are not supported.
Can’t Play and so on.
Do not connect anything other than a USB stor-
The operation was disabled. Road shocks may interrupt disc playback. age device.
Use 12-cm discs.
Run the same command for another station.
Use only conventional, fully circular discs. Firmly secure the USB storage device when driv-
ing. Do not let the USB storage device fall onto the
floor, where it may become jammed under the
Application
brake or accelerator pedal.
No BT device. Go to BT MENU to register. Depending on the USB storage device, the follow-
No Bluetooth device found. ing problems may occur.
Follow the instructions that appear on the ! The device may cause audible interference
screen. when you are listening to the radio.
En 25
<QRD3230-A>25
Black plate (26,1)
Appendix
This unit supports only the following types of SD Firmly secure the iPod when driving. Do not let the File extension: .mp3 Only the first 32 characters can be displayed as a
memory cards. iPod fall onto the floor, where it may become file name (including the file extension) or a folder
Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR
! SD jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal. name.
! miniSD Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz,
About iPod settings This unit may not work properly depending on the
! microSD 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz for emphasis)
! When an iPod is connected, this unit changes application used to encode WMA files.
! SDHC
the EQ (equalizer) setting of the iPod to off in Compatible ID3 tag version: 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4
There may be a slight delay at the start of playback
Keep the SD memory card out of the reach of chil- order to optimize the acoustics. When you dis- (ID3 tag Version 2.x is given priority over Version
of audio files embedded with image data or audio
dren. Should the SD memory card be swallowed, connect the iPod, the EQ returns to the original 1.x.)
files stored on a USB storage device that has nu-
consult a doctor immediately. setting.
M3u playlist: Not compatible merous folder hierarchies.
! You cannot set Repeat to off on the iPod when
Do not touch the connectors of the SD memory
using this unit. Repeat is automatically MP3i (MP3 interactive), mp3 PRO: Not compatible
card directly with your fingers or with any metal
changed to All when the iPod is connected to Disc
device.
this unit.
Do not insert anything other than an SD memory WAV
Incompatible text saved on the iPod will not be dis- Playable folder hierarchy: up to eight tiers (A prac-
card into the SD card slot. If a metal object (such tical hierarchy is less than two tiers.)
played by the unit. File extension: .wav
as a coin) is inserted into the slot, the internal cir-
cuits may break and cause malfunctions. Playable folders: up to 99
Quantization bits: 8 and 16 (LPCM), 4 (MS
When inserting a miniSD or microSD, use an ADPCM) Playable files: up to 999
CAUTION
adapter. Do not use an adapter which has metal Sampling frequency: 16 kHz to 48 kHz (LPCM), File system: ISO 9660 Level 1 and 2, Romeo, Joliet
Do not leave the discs/external storage device
parts other than the connectors exposed. 22.05 kHz and 44.1 kHz (MS ADPCM)
(USB, SD) or iPod in places with high tempera- Multi-session playback: Compatible
Do not insert a damaged SD memory card (e.g. tures.
warped, label peeled off) as it may not be ejected ! You cannot use this function with USB MTP. Packet write data transfer: Not compatible
from the slot. Regardless of the length of blank sections be-
Compressed audio AAC
Do not try to force an SD memory card into the SD tween the songs from the original recording, com-
card slot as the card or this unit may be damaged.
compatibility (disc, USB, SD) pressed audio discs play with a short pause
Compatible format: AAC encoded by iTunes between songs.
When ejecting an SD memory card, press it and WMA
hold it until it clicks. Take care not to release your File extension: .m4a
finger immediately after you press on the card as File extension: .wma External storage device (USB, SD)
Sampling frequency: 11.025 kHz to 48 kHz
the card may shoot out of the slot and cause dam- Bit rate: 48 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), 48 kbps to
age or injury. If the card shoots out of the slot, it Transmission rate: 16 kbps to 320 kbps, VBR
384 kbps (VBR) Playable folder hierarchy: up to eight tiers (A prac-
may become lost. Apple Lossless: Not compatible tical hierarchy is less than two tiers.)
Sampling frequency: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
AAC file bought from the iTunes Store (.m4p file Playable folders: up to 1 500
Windows Mediaä Audio Professional, Lossless,
extension): Not compatible
Voice/DRM Stream/Stream with video: Not com- Playable files: up to 15 000
patible Playback of copyright-protected files: Not compati-
ble
26 En
<QRD3230-A>26
Black plate (27,1)
Appendix
English
! iPod nano (4th generation) 02 ! A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile)
There may be a slight delay when starting play- ! iPod nano (3rd generation) ! AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile)
back of audio files on a USB storage device with ! iPod nano (2nd generation) : Folder 1.3
numerous folder hierarchies. ! iPod nano (1st generation) 03
: Compressed ! SPP (Serial Port Profile) 1.1
! iPhone 5 audio file
04
! iPhone 4S 01 to 05: Folder
SD memory card ! iPhone 4 number
Copyright and trademark
! iPhone 3GS 05 1 to 6: Playback
There is no compatibility for Multi Media Cards Bluetooth
! iPhone 3G Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 sequence â
(MMC). The Bluetooth word mark and logos are regis-
! iPhone
tered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Compatibility with all SD memory cards is not
Depending on the generation or version of the
Disc and any use of such marks by PIONEER
guaranteed. CORPORATION is under license. Other trade-
iPod, some functions may not be available.
Folder selection sequence or other operation
This unit is not compatible with SD-Audio. may differ depending on the encoding or writing marks and trade names are those of their re-
Operations may vary depending on the software software. spective owners.
version of iPod.
CAUTION Users of iPod with the Lightning Connector should External storage device (USB, SD) iTunes
The playback sequence is the same as the re- Apple and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
! Pioneer accepts no responsibility for data use the Lightning to USB Cable (supplied with
iPod). corded sequence in the external storage device registered in the U.S. and other countries.
lost on USB memory/USB portable audio
players/SD memory cards/SDHC memory (USB, SD).
Users of iPod with the Dock Connector should use To specify the playback sequence, the following MP3
cards, even if that data is lost while this unit CD-IU51. For details, consult your dealer.
is used. method is recommended. Supply of this product only conveys a license for
! Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility with About the file/format compatibility, refer to the 1 Create a file name that includes numbers private, non-commercial use and does not con-
all USB mass storage devices and assumes iPod manuals. that specify the playback sequence (e.g., vey a license nor imply any right to use this prod-
no responsibility for any loss of data on 001xxx.mp3 and 099yyy.mp3). uct in any commercial (i.e. revenue-generating)
Audiobook, Podcast: Compatible 2 Put those files into a folder. real time broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite,
media players, smart phones, or other devi-
ces while using this product. 3 Save the folder that contains the files to the cable and/or any other media), broadcasting/
external storage device (USB, SD). streaming via internet, intranets and/or other
CAUTION However, depending on the system environment, networks or in other electronic content distribu-
iPod compatibility Pioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost you may not be able to specify the playback se- tion systems, such as pay-audio or audio-on-de-
on the iPod, even if that data is lost while this quence. mand applications. An independent license for
This unit supports only the following iPod mod-
unit is used. For USB portable audio players, the sequence is such use is required. For details, please visit
els.
different and depends on the player. http://www.mp3licensing.com.
Made for
! iPod touch (5th generation) Sequence of audio files
! iPod touch (4th generation)
WMA
Bluetooth profiles Windows Media is either a registered trademark
! iPod touch (3rd generation) The user cannot assign folder numbers and
specify playback sequences with this unit. In order to use Bluetooth wireless technology, or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
! iPod touch (2nd generation)
devices must be able to interpret certain pro- United States and/or other countries.
! iPod touch (1st generation)
files. This unit is compatible with the following This product includes technology owned by
! iPod classic
profiles. Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or
! iPod with video
! iPod nano (7th generation) ! GAP (Generic Access Profile) distributed without a license from Microsoft
! OPP (Object Push Profile) Licensing, Inc.
En 27
<QRD3230-A>27
Black plate (28,1)
Appendix
28 En
<QRD3230-A>28
Black plate (29,1)
Appendix
Additional information
English
FM tuner
Frequency range .............. 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
Usable sensitivity ............. 9 dBf (0.8 µV/75 W, mono, S/N:
30 dB)
Signal-to-noise ratio ......... 72 dB (IEC-A network)
AM tuner
Frequency range .............. 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz (9 kHz)
530 kHz to 1 640 kHz (10 kHz)
Usable sensitivity ............. 25 µV (S/N: 20 dB)
Signal-to-noise ratio ......... 62 dB (IEC-A network)
Bluetooth
(DEH-X9650BT/DEH-X8650BT)
Version ............................ Bluetooth 3.0 certified
Output power ................... +4 dBm Maximum
(Power class 2)
Note
Specifications and the design are subject to
modifications without notice.
En 29
<QRD3230-A>29
Black plate (30,1)
01 目錄 開始使用前
開始使用前 感謝您購買本先鋒產品
關於本機 30 為確保使用方式正確,使用本產品前請詳閱本
遭遇問題時 30 手冊。尤為重要的是要閱讀並遵照本手冊中的
警告與注意。請將本手冊存放於安全及將來參
使用本機 考時方便取得的地方。
主機 31
遙控器 31
設定選單 31 關於本機
安裝前面板 32
基本操作 32
遙控器的使用與保養 33
警告
常用選單操作 33 ! 請勿嘗試自行安裝或維修本產品。若未經電
收音機 33 子設備與汽車配件方面的專門訓練,或具有
CD/CD-R/CD-RW及外部儲存裝置(USB、 相關的工作經驗即貿然安裝或維修本產品,
SD) 34 則會有導致發生觸電或其他事故的危險。
iPod 36 ! 請勿嘗試在行駛時操作本機。嘗試使用裝置
使用藍牙無線技術 37 的控制鍵之前,請確定將車輛停靠在路邊,
串流處理Pandoraâ 39 或將車輛停放在安全的位置。
使用連接裝置的應用程式 40
音訊調整 41
使用不同的娛樂顯示 42 注意
選擇冷光顏色 42 ! 請勿讓本機接觸到液體。否則可能造成人員
自訂冷光顏色 42
觸電。此外,接觸到液體可能導致本機損
關於MIXTRAX 42
系統選單 43 壞、冒煙和過熱。
設定選單 44 ! 請務必保持在適當的低音量,確保能聽見外
系統選單 44 面的聲響。
使用AUX播放來源 45 ! 避免暴露在濕氣中。
開啟或關閉顯示幕 45
若出現不需要的顯示畫面 45
注意
安裝 本產品為第一級雷射產品,依雷射產品的安
連接 45
全性規範 IEC 60825-1:2007。
安裝 46
安裝麥克風 47
附加資訊
故障排除 48
錯誤訊息 48
操作指南 50
壓縮音訊相容性(碟片、USB、SD) 50 遭遇問題時
iPod相容性 51 如果本機無法正常運作,請聯絡您的經銷商或
音訊檔案順序 51 最近的先鋒授權服務站。
藍牙設定檔 51
版權及商標 51
規格 52
30 Zhtw
<QRD3230-A>30
Black plate (31,1)
使用本機 使用本機 02
主機 4 (清單) 遙控器
DEH-X9650BT/DEH-X9650SD DEH-X9650BT/DEH-X8650BT
DEH-X9650BT/DEH-X9650SD f 按下即可在使用電話時開始與呼叫方交談。
開啟按鈕 l
1 2 3 4 5 5 FUNCTION
DEH-X8650BT/DEH-X7650SD
DEH-X9650SD/DEH-X7650SD
拆卸按鈕
9 g 按此按鈕可選擇各項功能。
6 AUX輸入插孔(3.5 mm立體聲插孔) m h
中文
LIST/ENTER
7 UP / DOWN(往上/往下) l i m 按下以根據來源顯示清單。
在操作選單中,按下可控制功能。
b a 98 7 6 8 MIX/DISP OFF 1 j
9 BAND/ (iPod) k
c
DEH-X9650BT/DEH-X8650BT 設定選單
(電話)
VOLUME
1 在安裝本機後,將點火開關轉至ON。
DEH-X9650SD f
按此按鈕可調高或調低音量。
出現Set up。
a
CLK
g
MUTE 2 轉動M.C.以切換至YES。
DEH-X7650SD 按此按鈕可靜音。再按一次即可取消靜音。 # 若您未在30秒內使用本機,設定選單將不會顯
APP
e d a/b/c/d
示。
b MULTI-CONTROL (M.C.) # 若您不想現在設定,請轉動M.C.以切換至NO。
按下以執行手動搜尋調頻、快進、倒退和曲
DEH-X8650BT/DEH-X7650SD h
c 碟片槽 目搜尋控制。
同樣也可用於控制功能。
3 按M.C.以選擇。
1 a 92 c d d h(退出)
4 請依照這些步驟設定選單。
SD記憶卡插槽
e DEH-X9650BT/DEH-X8650BT 為繼續執行下一個選單選項,您需要確認選
拆卸前面板,您便可以接觸SD記憶卡插槽。 按下以結束通話、拒接來電或在有其他來電 擇。
i 的情形下拒接待接來電。
e 1 轉動M.C.可變更年份。
2 按M.C.選擇日期。
3 轉動M.C.以變更日期。
1 SRC/OFF
4 按M.C.選擇月份。
2 LEVER 5 轉動M.C.以變更月份。
6 按M.C.確認選擇。
3 /DISP
Zhtw 31
<QRD3230-A>31
Black plate (32,1)
02 使用本機 使用本機
註
! 您可在系統選單及設定選單中設定選單選
項。 如需有關設定的詳細資訊,請參閱第43
頁上系統選單及第44頁上設定選單。
! 按SRC/OFF可取消設定選單。
32 Zhtw
<QRD3230-A>32
Black plate (33,1)
使用本機 使用本機 02
中文
2 裝入電池,正極(+)與負極(-)端的電極確 返回上一個清單/類別(上一層資料夾/類別) 8 TEXT指示器 1 按 (清單)。
實對齊。 1 按 /DISP。 當收到收音機文字時顯示。 顯示預設畫面。
9 PTY標籤指示器
返回一般顯示畫面
a 程式服務名稱 2 使用M.C.在記憶體中儲存所選的頻率。
1 按BAND/ 。
b 頻率指示器 轉動可變更預設號碼。按住以儲存。
從清單/類別返回一般顯示畫面
1 按BAND/ 。 選擇波段 3 使用M.C.選擇所需電台。
選擇功能或清單 1 按BAND/ 直至所需的波段(FM-1、FM-2、 轉動可切換電台。按下可選擇。
FM-3為FM或AM)顯示。 # 從每個獨立的FM頻段可以調用針對FM頻段儲存的
1 轉動M.C.或LEVER。
警告 所有電台。
! 在本手冊中,「轉動M.C.」常用於描述選擇功 手動調整(逐格)
! 請將電池存放在兒童無法拿取之處。若誤吞 # 按下UP或DOWN也可以切換電台。
能或清單的操作。 1 轉動LEVER。
電池,請立即就醫。 ! 選擇在Tuning Mode下的Manual(手動調
! 電池(已安裝的電池組或電池)不得暴露在 頻)以使用此功能。
切換RDS顯示幕
陽光直射、火源等類似的過熱環境下。
收音機 切換預設電台
RDS(無線電資料系統)包含能協助搜尋無線電
台的數位資訊。
1 轉動LEVER。
注意
基本操作
! 選擇在Tuning Mode下的Preset(預設頻道) % 按 /DISP。
! 至少一個月不使用遙控器時,請取出電池。 1 23 4 5 6 7 以使用此功能。 PTY/頻率或節目服務名稱-歌曲標題/歌手名稱
! 如果換用錯誤的電池,則會有爆炸的危險。
搜尋
僅限換用相同或同類型的電池。 註
1 轉動並按住LEVER。
! 請勿使用金屬工具夾取電池。 ! 若無法取得程式服務名稱,將顯示廣播頻
! 轉動並按住LEVER時,您可以跳過電台。搜尋
! 請勿將電池存放於金屬置物盒中。 率。若偵測到程式服務名稱,將顯示程式服
調頻會在放開LEVER的同時啟動。
! 如果電池漏液,請將遙控器徹底擦拭乾淨並 務名稱。
裝上新電池。 89 a ! 視波段而定,文字資訊會變更。
! 處理廢舊電池時,請遵守政府條例或適用於 註
貴國或地區的環境公共指令規則。 RDS 如需有關Tuning Mode的詳細資訊,請參閱第
34頁上Tuning Mode(LEVER調頻設定)。
1 23 4 5 6 7
使用PI搜尋
若調諧器找不到適合的電台,或接收狀態變
差,本機會以相同的編序自動搜尋不同的電
台。在搜尋期間,會顯示PI SEEK且維持靜音。
重要事項
b
! 請勿將遙控器存放於高溫或陽光直射的區域
中。 非RDS或AM
Zhtw 33
<QRD3230-A>33
Black plate (34,1)
02 使用本機 使用本機
34 Zhtw
<QRD3230-A>34
Black plate (35,1)
使用本機 使用本機 02
中文
相容MTP的Android裝置(執行Android OS 4.0以 變更歌曲或類別的名稱
上)可透過MTP連線使用USB來源。若要連接 4 轉動M.C.選擇所需的電台。 1 轉動M.C.。 1 按住 以切換至連結播放模式。
Android裝置,請使用裝置隨附的連接線。 Artists(作者)-Albums(專輯)-Songs
! 此功能不相容於MIXTRAX。 5 按M.C.以選擇。 (歌曲)-Genres(曲風) 2 轉動M.C.可改變模式;按下則進行選擇。
! 此功能不相容於WAV。 建立新電台。 ! Artist -播放目前播放歌手的專輯。
播放
! 此功能不相容於音樂瀏覽。 ! Album - 播放目前播放專輯的歌曲清單。
註 1 選擇歌曲後,按M.C.。
! Genre - 播放目前播放曲風的專輯清單。
當沒有可用的標籤資訊時,此功能會停用。 選擇的歌曲/專輯將在目前播放歌曲後播放。
註 查看所選類別中的歌曲清單
! 不使用時,請中斷USB儲存裝置與本機的連 1 選擇類別後,按M.C.。
選擇並播放名稱清單中的檔案/曲目 註
接。 播放所選類別中的歌曲
在Music browse中選擇OFF後將無法使用此功 ! 若您使用除連結搜尋以外的功能(例如快速
! 若有兩個USB儲存裝置連接本機,則會先操 1 選擇類別後,按住M.C.。
能。 如需詳細資料,請參閱第36頁上 前進及快速倒轉),選擇的歌曲/專輯可能
作連接選擇來源的裝置。
Music browse(音樂瀏覽)。 按字母順序搜尋清單 會取消。
! 在切換至操作其他裝置前,請中斷連接USB
1 顯示所選類別的清單時,請按 切換至字母搜 ! 視選擇播放的歌曲而定,目前播放歌曲的尾
儲存裝置的通訊。
1 按 (清單)切換至檔案/曲目名稱清單模 尋模式。
端及所選歌曲/專輯的開頭可能會遭截斷。
使用MIXTRAX按鍵操作 式。 2 轉動M.C.選擇字母。
3 按M.C.顯示字母清單。 功能設定
2 使用M.C.選擇所需的檔案名稱(或資料夾名 ! 若要取消搜尋,請按下 /DISP。 按M.C.顯示主選單。
開啟或關閉MIXTRAX 1
稱)。
選擇USB或SD作為來源時可使用此功能。
您無法在使用USB MTP時使用此功能。 註 2 轉動M.C.可變更選單選項,且按下可選擇
變更檔案或資料夾名稱 ! 本機必須建立索引,以協助Artists、 FUNCTION。
1 按下MIX/DISP OFF可開啟或關閉MIXTRAX。
1 轉動M.C.。 Albums、Songs及Genres搜尋。一般而
! 有關MIXTRAX的詳細資料,請參閱第42頁上關
於MIXTRAX。 播放 言,建立1 000首歌曲的索引約花費70秒的時 3 轉動M.C.選擇功能。
1 選擇檔案或曲目後,按下M.C.。 間,而我們建議可使用多達3 000首歌。請注 選擇後即可調整下列功能。
意,某些類型的檔案可能會花費比其他檔案 ! 當來源設為CD時,Music browse和
切換顯示幕 查看所選資料夾中的檔案(或資料夾)清單 更長的時間來建立索引。 Link play無法使用。
選擇所需的文字資訊 1 選擇資料夾後,按M.C.。 ! 播放清單時是否延遲,將視USB儲存裝置中 ! 在Music browse中選擇OFF後將無法使用
播放所選資料夾中的歌曲 的檔案數量而定。 Link play。 如需詳細資料,請參閱第36頁上
% 按 /DISP。 1 選擇資料夾後,按住M.C.。 ! 在建立索引或清單期間按鍵可能無法使用。 Music browse(音樂瀏覽)。
! 每次開啟本機時,都會重新建立清單。
建立新的Pandora電台
選擇SD作為來源時可使用此功能。
瀏覽歌曲 播放與目前播放歌曲有關的歌曲
您可在以標籤資訊為基礎的Pandora來源中建立 選擇USB或SD作為來源時可使用此功能。 選擇USB或SD作為來源時可使用此功能。
新的電台。
Zhtw 35
<QRD3230-A>35
Black plate (36,1)
02 使用本機 使用本機
6 S.Rtrv指示器 2 轉動M.C.選擇所需的設定。
Music browse(音樂瀏覽)
1 按M.C.顯示設定模式。 在數位音樂修補功能開啟時出現。 Track(從曲目)-Artist(從作者)
您可瀏覽USB儲存裝置和SD中的音樂。 2 轉動M.C.可改變模式;按下則進行選擇。 7 歌曲時間(進程欄)
1 按M.C.選擇所需設定。 如需有關設定的詳細資料,請參閱第35頁上播 8 播放時間指示器 3 按M.C.以選擇。
! ON -類別/歌曲清單可以使用。 放與目前播放歌曲有關的歌曲。 切換至Pandora來源並顯示Pandora電台的清
! OFF -檔案/資料夾清單可以使用。
Pause(暫停) 在iPod上播放歌曲 單。
在某些情況下,可能會出現詢問是否要在本機 1 將iPod接至USB連接線。
上建立資料庫的訊息。若出現此訊息,請完成 1 按M.C.可暫停或繼續播放。 4 轉動M.C.選擇所需的電台。
選擇曲目(章)
以下步驟再繼續。
1 轉動LEVER。
2 轉動M.C.以切換至Yes。 Sound Retriever(數位音樂修補) 5 按M.C.以選擇。
3 按M.C.以選擇。 自動增強壓縮音訊並還原豐富聲音。 快速前進或快速倒轉 建立新電台。
出現詢問您是否要儲存資料庫資訊至USB儲存 1 按M.C.選擇所需設定。 1 向左或右轉動並按住LEVER。
裝置/SD卡的訊息。
註
1-2-OFF(關閉) 選擇專輯
4 轉動M.C.以切換至Yes。 當沒有可用的標籤資訊時,此功能會停用。
1對低壓縮率有影響,而2則對高壓縮率有影 1 按UP或DOWN。
5 按M.C.以選擇。 響。
選擇No取消選項。 瀏覽歌曲
! 若ACC設為OFF,將刪除本機上的資料庫資訊。 註
1 按 (清單)切換至清單搜尋的頂層選單。
當ACC設為ON時,儲存資料庫資訊至USB儲存裝 ! 當控制模式設為Ctrl Audio時,無法開啟或
置/SD卡後,將可從USB儲存裝置/SD卡讀取儲 iPod 關閉iPod。
2 使用M.C.選擇一個類別/一首歌曲。
存的資料,還可提升處理的速度。 ! 連接iPod與本機前,請中斷耳機與iPod的連
基本操作
! 若USB儲存裝置/SD卡檔案中的資訊與儲存在 接。
變更歌曲或類別的名稱
USB儲存裝置/SD卡的資料庫資訊不同,可能需 DEH-X9650BT/DEH-X8650BT ! 關閉點火開關後,iPod將關閉約兩分鐘。
1 轉動M.C.。
要重建資料庫。在詢問是否要重建資料庫時, 1 2 3 4 Playlists(播放清單)-Artists(作者)-Al-
將出現此訊息。 使用MIXTRAX按鍵操作
bums(專輯)-Songs(歌曲)-Podcasts
Play mode(重播) (播客)-Genres(曲風)-Composers
開啟或關閉MIXTRAX (作曲家)-Audiobooks(有聲書)
1 按M.C.可選擇重播範圍。 1 按下MIX/DISP OFF可開啟或關閉MIXTRAX。
! 有關MIXTRAX的詳細資料,請參閱第42頁上關 播放
CD/CD-R/CD-RW
! Disc repeat-重播所有曲目
5 6 7 8 於MIXTRAX。 1 選擇歌曲後,按M.C.。
! Track repeat-重播目前曲目 查看所選類別中的歌曲清單
DEH-X9650SD/DEH-X7650SD
! Folder repeat-重播目前資料夾 1 選擇類別後,按M.C.。
1 2 3 4 切換顯示幕
外部儲存裝置(USB、SD)
! All repeat-重播所有檔案 選擇所需的文字資訊 播放所選類別中的歌曲
1 選擇類別後,按住M.C.。
! Track repeat-重播目前檔案
! Folder repeat-重播目前資料夾 % 按 /DISP。
按字母順序搜尋清單
1 顯示所選類別的清單時,請按 切換至字母搜
Random mode(隨機播放) 建立新的Pandora電台 尋模式。
5 7 8 6
1 按M.C.可開啟或關閉隨機播放。
您可在以標籤資訊為基礎的Pandora來源中建立 2 轉動M.C.選擇字母。
1 LINK PLAY指示器 新的電台。 3 按M.C.顯示字母清單。
Link play(連結播放) ! 若要取消搜尋,請按下 /DISP。
2 重播指示器
3 歌曲編號指示器 1 按住 /DISP。
4 隨機選曲指示器
5 PLAY/PAUSE指示器
36 Zhtw
<QRD3230-A>36
Black plate (37,1)
使用本機 使用本機 02
中文
您可以從下列清單播放歌曲。 1 按M.C.顯示主選單。 1 按M.C.可暫停或繼續播放。
• 目前播放作者的專輯清單
‧ 目前播放專輯的歌曲清單 2 轉動M.C.可變更選單選項,且按下可選擇 Audiobooks(有聲書速度) 基本操作
‧ 目前播放曲風的專輯清單 FUNCTION。
1 按M.C.選擇所需設定。
撥打電話
1 按住 以切換至連結播放模式。 ! Faster - 比正常還快的速度播放
3 轉動M.C.選擇功能。 請參閱第38頁上電話選單操作。
! Normal-正常速度播放
選擇後即可調整下列功能。
2 轉動M.C.可改變模式;按下則進行選擇。 ! Slower - 比正常還慢的速度播放 接聽電話
! 在控制模式中選擇Ctrl iPod後將只能使用
! Artist -播放目前播放歌手的專輯。 1 收到通話時,按 。
Play mode、Shuffle mode、Shuffle all、 Sound Retriever(數位音樂修補)
! Album - 播放目前播放專輯的歌曲清單。 Link play及Audiobooks。如需詳細資料, 結束通話
! Genre - 播放目前播放曲風的專輯清單。 請參閱第37頁上從您的iPod使用本機的iPod 1 按M.C.選擇所需設定。 1 按 。
選擇的歌曲/專輯將在目前播放歌曲後播放。 功能。 1-2-OFF(關閉)
拒接來電
1對低壓縮率有影響,而2則對高壓縮率有影
註 1 收到通話時,按住 。
Play mode(重播) 響。
! 若您使用除連結搜尋以外的功能(例如快速
接聽待接來電
前進及快速倒轉),選擇的歌曲/專輯可能
1 按M.C.可選擇重播範圍。 1 收到通話時,按 。
會取消。
! 視選擇播放的歌曲而定,目前播放歌曲的尾
! Repeat One-重播目前歌曲 使用藍牙無線技術 切換保留中的來電
! Repeat All-重播所選清單內的所有歌曲
端及所選歌曲/專輯的開頭可能會遭截斷。 僅適用於DEH-X9650BT及DEH-X8650BT 1 按M.C.。
! 控制模式設為Ctrl iPod時,重播範圍將設為與
連接iPod的設定相同。 取消待接來電
從您的iPod使用本機的iPod功能 使用藍牙電話 1 按住 。
從連接的iPod上控制本機的iPod功能。 Shuffle mode(隨機選曲)
重要事項 調整對方的收聽音量
Ctrl iPod不相容於下列iPod型號。 ! 透過藍牙連接您的電話並讓本機進入待機模
1 按M.C.選擇所需設定。 1 通話時轉動LEVER。
! 第一代iPod nano 式時,儘管引擎未運轉但仍會消耗電瓶電
! Shuffle Songs-依隨機順序播放所選擇清 ! 若開啟隱私模式,則本功能無法使用。
! iPod with video 力。
單中的歌曲。
! 操作方式視行動電話的機型而異。 開啟或關閉個人模式
! Shuffle Albums-依序播放隨機選擇的專
% 按BAND/ 可切換控制模式。 ! 當您在駕駛時,需要較多注意力的進階操作 1 通話時按BAND/ 。
輯中的歌曲。
! Ctrl iPod-從連接的iPod上操作本機的iPod 均被禁止,例如在監視器上撥打號碼、使用
! Shuffle OFF-取消隨機播放。 註
功能。 電話簿等。在繼續操作前,確定已將車子停
! Ctrl Audio-使用本機來控制本機的iPod功 Shuffle all(全部隨機播放) 如果行動電話上選擇了隱私模式,則無法進行
在安全處並拉起/踩下手煞車。
能。 免持通話。
1 按M.C.開啟全部隨機播放。
註 若要關閉Shuffle all,請在Shuffle mode中選
! 切換控制模式至Ctrl iPod以暫停播放歌曲。 使用語音辨識功能
擇 Shuffle OFF。 如需詳細資料,請參閱第37
使用iPod以繼續播放。 此功能可用於配備語音辨識並以藍牙連接的
頁上Shuffle mode(隨機選曲)。
iPhone。
Zhtw 37
<QRD3230-A>37
Black plate (38,1)
02 使用本機 使用本機
1 按住M.C.以切換至語音辨識模式。
Pin code input(PIN碼輸入) Missed calls(未接來電記錄)
1 按M.C.顯示設定模式。
Dialled calls(已撥電話記錄)
2 按下M.C.然後與麥克風通話,即可輸入語音 2 轉動M.C.選擇您要刪除的裝置名稱。 您必須在裝置上輸入PIN碼,以確認藍牙連線。 預
Received calls(已接來電記錄)
命令。 ! 按住M.C.以切換藍牙裝置位址和裝置名 設代碼為0000,但您可以使用此功能變更代碼。
若要結束語音辨識模式,請按下BAND/ 。 稱。 1 按M.C.顯示設定模式。
1 按下 M.C.可顯示電話號碼清單。
3 按M.C.顯示Delete YES。 2 轉動M.C.選擇號碼。
註 2 轉動M.C.選擇姓名或電話號碼。
4 按M.C.可從裝置清單中刪除裝置資訊。 3 按M.C.將游標移到下一個位置。
! 有關語音辨識功能的詳細資料,請查閱您 3 按M.C.撥打電話。
! 未在裝置清單中選擇任何裝置時,無法使用此 4 在輸入PIN碼後,按住M.C.。
! 若要顯示您選擇的聯絡人詳細資訊,請按住M.
iPhone的手冊。 功能。 ! 輸入後,按M.C.可返回至PIN碼輸入顯示,
! 為了正確識別及理解您的語音命令,請確定 C.。
! 使用此功能時,請勿關閉引擎。 您便可以更改PIN碼。
車輛狀況適合使用語音辨識。 PhoneBook(電話簿)
! 請注意,經車輛窗戶吹入的風聲及來自車輛 Add device(連接新的裝置) Device INFO(藍牙裝置位址顯示)
外側的噪音可能會干擾語音命令的操作。 與電話建立連線後,將自動傳輸您電話上的聯絡
1 按M.C.開始搜尋。 1 按M.C.顯示設定模式。 人。 若未自動傳輸,請使用您的電話選單傳輸聯
! 為獲得最佳挑選結果,應將麥克風直接置於
! 若要取消,請在搜尋時按下M.C.。 2 按M.C.選擇所需設定。 絡人。 在使用電話選單時,本機的可視性應為開
離駕駛人員正前方一段適當距離。
! 如果本機找不到任何可用的行動電話,則 裝置名稱-藍牙裝置位址 啟。 請參閱第38頁上Visibility(設定本機的可視
! 啟動命令後太快說話可能會造成語音辨識失
會顯示Not found。 性)。
敗。 Guest Mode(訪客模式)
2 轉動M.C.從裝置清單中選擇裝置。 1 按下M.C.顯示ABC Search(字母清單)。
! 請緩慢、從容且清楚的說出。
! 如果找不到想要的裝置,請選擇RE- 開啟此模式時,若在已有三部配對裝置時嘗試配 2 轉動M.C.選擇您所尋找的名字的第一個字母。
SEARCH。 對,本機將自動移至Delete device畫面,並提示 3 按M.C.顯示已登錄名字的清單。
連接選單操作 ! 按住M.C.以切換藍牙裝置位址和裝置名 您刪除裝置。如需詳細資料,請參閱第38頁上 4 轉動M.C.選擇您要搜尋的名稱。
重要事項 稱。 Delete device(從裝置清單刪除裝置)。 5 按下 M.C.可顯示電話號碼清單。
若一次連接多部藍牙裝置(例如同時連接電話 3 按M.C.可連接所選擇的裝置。 1 按下M.C.可開啟或關閉訪客模式。 6 轉動M.C.選擇您要撥打的電話號碼。
及不同的音訊播放機),連接的裝置可能無法 ! 若要完成連線,請檢查裝置名稱(Pioneer 7 按M.C.撥打電話。
正常運作。 Auto pairing(自動配對)
BT Unit)。 如有需要,請在裝置上輸入
Phone Function(電話功能)
PIN碼。 若在iPhone透過USB連接本機時開啟此功能,將自
1 按住 來顯示連線選單。 ! PIN碼預設為0000。您可以更改此代碼。 動提示您配對本機和iPhone。 您可以從此選單設定Auto answer、Ring tone和
# 您無法在通話時執行此步驟。 ! 在本機及藍牙裝置上都會顯示6位數字。 1 按M.C.可開啟或關閉自動配對。 PH.B.Name view。 如需詳細資料,請參閱第38
若在本機及藍牙裝置上顯示的6位數字相 ! 視您使用的iOS版本而定,本功能有可能無法 頁上功能與操作。
2 轉動M.C.選擇功能。 同,請選擇是。 使用。
選擇後即可調整下列功能。 ! 6位數字顯示在本機顯示幕上。開啟已建立 ! 此功能無法用於USB連接埠2。
的連線,此數字就會消失。 功能與操作
Device list(從裝置清單連線至裝置或中斷連線) ! 若無法使用本機完成連線,請使用裝置來 1 顯示Phone Function。
連接本機。 電話選單操作
請參閱第38頁上Phone Function(電話功
1 按M.C.顯示設定模式。 ! 如果已配對三個裝置,則會顯示Device 1 按下 顯示電話選單。 能)。
2 轉動M.C.選擇您要連接/中斷連接的裝置名 Full,且無法執行此操作。 在此情況中,
稱。 請先刪除已配備的裝置。 2 轉動M.C.選擇功能。 2 按下M.C.可顯示功能選單。
! 按住M.C.以切換藍牙裝置位址和裝置名
Auto connect(自動連線至藍牙裝置) 選擇後即可調整下列功能。
稱。
3 轉動M.C.選擇功能。
3 按M.C.連接/中斷連接所選擇的裝置。
1 按下M.C.來開啟或關閉自動連線功能。 選擇後即可調整下列功能。
一建立連線後,就會顯示Connected。
! 未在裝置清單中選擇任何裝置時,無法使用此 Visibility(設定本機的可視性)
Auto answer(自動接聽)
功能。
可開啟藍牙可視性,讓其他裝置也能找到本機。
Delete device(從裝置清單刪除裝置) 1 按下M.C.可開啟或關閉此裝置的可視性。 1 按下M.C.來開啟或關閉自動接聽功能。
38 Zhtw
<QRD3230-A>38
Black plate (39,1)
使用本機 使用本機 02
基本操作 ! 線上建立免費或付費帳戶。您可由iPhone或網站
Ring tone(鈴聲選擇) Play(播放)
上使用Pandora應用程式建立帳戶。下列為URL:
1 按下M.C.可開啟或關閉鈴聲。
1 2 1 按M.C.開始播放。
http://www.pandora.com/register
! 若您iPhone的行動數據方案未提供無限資料使用
PH.B.Name view(電話簿名稱瀏覽) Stop(停止) 量,則需向您的電信業者申請並繳交額外費用以
透過3G及/或EDGE網路使用Pandora服務。
1 按下M.C.可顛倒電話簿中的姓名順序。 1 按M.C.可停止播放。 ! 您需透過3G、EDGE或Wi-Fi網路連接網際網路,
Pause(暫停) 以使用Pandora的服務。
中文
3 4 5 6
藍牙音訊 限制:
1 按M.C.可暫停或繼續播放。
重要事項 1 裝置名稱 ! 視網際網路的可用性而定,您可能無法收到
! 視與本機連接的藍牙音訊播放器的不同,可 顯示所連接藍牙音訊播放器的裝置名稱。 Random(隨機播放)
Pandora的服務。
用的操作受以下兩個等級的限制: 2 曲目號碼指示器 ! Pandora的服務如有變更恕不另行通知。該項服
— A2DP設定檔(進階音訊分配設定檔): 您只 3 PLAY/PAUSE指示器 1 按M.C.可開啟或關閉隨機播放。
務可能會受到下列狀況影響: iPhone韌體版
能在音訊播放機上播放歌曲。 4 S.Rtrv指示器 ! 視連接的藍牙音訊播放機類型而定,可能
本、Pandora應用程式韌體版本、變更為Pandora
A2DP連線只能用於Pandora(智慧型手 在數位音樂修補功能開啟時出現。 無法使用此功能。
音樂服務。
機)、App(智慧型手機)及BT Audio。 5 歌曲時間(進程欄) ! 隨機範圍視使用中的藍牙音訊播放機而
! 透過先鋒車用音訊/視訊產品使用Pandora服務
— AVRCP設定檔(音訊/視訊遙控器設定檔): 6 播放時間指示器 異。
時,Pandora服務的特定功能有可能無法使用。
您可以執行播放、暫停播放、選擇歌曲等。 Repeat(重播) 這些功能包括但不限於下列: 建立新電台、刪
! 若本機要搭配藍牙音訊播放機使用,請參閱 快速前進或快速倒轉 除電台、傳送有關目前電台的資訊、在iTunes購
本手冊及您裝置的手冊。 1 向左或右轉動並按住LEVER。 1 按M.C.可選擇重播範圍。 買曲目、檢視其他文字資訊、登入Pandora、調
! 由於從您行動電話發出的訊號可能會造成噪 ! 視連接的藍牙音訊播放機類型而定,可能 整細胞網路音質。
選擇曲目
音,因此在使用藍牙音訊播放機聆聽歌曲時 無法使用此功能。 Pandora網路電台是一項與先鋒無關的音樂服
1 轉動LEVER。
請避免使用行動電話。 ! 重播範圍視使用中的藍牙音訊播放機而 務。如需詳細資訊請至
! 當使用電話時,藍牙音訊播放機的聲音為靜 暫停及開始播放 異。 http://www.pandora.com。
音。 1 按BAND/ 。 Pandora行動應用程式適用於大多數iPhone和智
Sound Retriever(數位音樂修補)
! 正在使用藍牙音訊播放機時,您無法自動連 慧型手機,如需最新相容性資訊,請造訪
接至藍牙電話。 www.pandora.com/everywhere/mobile。
切換顯示幕 1 按M.C.選擇所需設定。
! 即使您在聆聽歌曲時從藍牙音訊播放機切換
1-2-OFF(關閉)
至其他來源,播放仍會繼續。 選擇所需的文字資訊 開始供iPhone使用者使用的程序
1對低壓縮率有影響,而2則對高壓縮率有影
! 視您連接本機的藍牙音訊播放機而定,某些
響。 將iPhone接至USB連接線。
功能可能不會顯示操作及資訊顯示畫面。 % 按 /DISP。 1
Zhtw 39
<QRD3230-A>39
Black plate (40,1)
02 使用本機 使用本機
開始供智慧型手機使用者使用的程序 播放曲目 播放
1 按M.C.可暫停或繼續播放。
僅適用於DEH-X9650BT及DEH-X8650BT 如需詳細資料,請參閱第39頁上開始供iPhone使 1 選擇隨機播放或電台後,按M.C.。
用者使用的程序或第40頁上開始供智慧型手機使 Sound Retriever(數位音樂修補)
刪除電台
1 使用藍牙無線技術連接智慧型手機與本機。 用者使用的程序。
1 選擇電台後,按住M.C.。 1 按M.C.選擇所需設定。
如需詳細資料,請參閱第38頁上連接選單操
跳過曲目 出現DELETE YES。
作。 1-2-OFF(關閉)
1 向右轉動LEVER。 若要取消,請按下 /DISP。 您將返回上一 1對低壓縮率有影響,而2則對高壓縮率有影
層。 響。
2 在APP CONNECT MODE中選擇Bluetooth 暫停播放
2 按M.C.。
。 如需詳細資料,請參閱第44頁上 1 按BAND/ 可暫停或繼續播放。
電台將刪除。
APP CONNECT MODE(APP連接模式設定)。
給予拇指向上的評價
1 按下UP可對目前播放的曲目給予「拇指向 使用連接裝置的應用程式
3 將來源切換至Pandora。 功能設定
上」的評價。 您可使用本機來執行串流播放及控制iPhone或
智慧型手機應用程式將自動啟動。若無法啟
動,請依照畫面說明嘗試解決問題。 給予拇指向下的評價 1 按M.C.顯示主選單。 智慧型手機應用程式中的曲目,或只進行串流
1 按下DOWN可對目前播放的曲目給予「拇指
播放。
基本操作 向下」的評價並跳至下一首曲目。 2 轉動M.C.可變更選單選項,且按下可選擇
FUNCTION。
DEH-X9650BT/DEH-X8650BT 重要事項
12 切換顯示幕 3 轉動M.C.選擇功能。 使用協力廠商應用程式可能需要或必須提供
選擇所需的文字資訊 選擇後即可調整下列功能。 個人身份資訊,不論是否要建立使用者帳戶
或其他供特定應用程式使用的地理位置資
% 按 /DISP。 Bookmark(書籤) 料。
所有協力廠商應用程式皆由個別供應商負
註 1 按下M.C.可儲存曲目資訊。 責,包括但不限於收集和保障使用者資料及
3 4 5 6 視電台而定,文字資訊會變更。 隱私權。在存取協力廠商應用程式時,您即
New station(新電台)
已同意檢閱供應商的服務條款及隱私政策。
DEH-X9650SD/DEH-X7650SD
選擇及播放隨機播放/電台清單 將會從所選作者、曲目或曲風的資訊建立新的電 若您不同意供應商的政策條款或不同意使用
12 顯示在本機上的顯示畫面可能與顯示在連接裝 台。 適當地點的地理位置資料,請勿使用該協力
置上的不同。 1 按M.C.顯示設定模式。 廠商的應用程式。
2 轉動M.C.選擇所需的設定。
1 按下 (清單)切換至隨機播放/電台清單 From Track(從曲目)-From Artist(從作
模式。 者)-From Genre(從曲風) 連接裝置的相容性資訊
3 按M.C.以選擇。 下列為有關在本機上使用iPhone或智慧型手機
3 5 6 4 選擇From Track或From Artist建立新的電台。
2 使用M.C.選擇隨機播放或所需電台。 應用程式所需端子的詳細資訊。
若選擇From Genre,請完成以下概述程序。
1 拇指向上/拇指向下指示器
變更排序 4 轉動M.C.選擇曲風。 iPhone使用者須知
2 隨機選曲指示器
1 按 (清單)。 5 按M.C.以選擇。 ! 此功能相容於iPhone及iPod touch。
3 PLAY/PAUSE指示器
! ABC-您可依字母順序排序清單中的項目 6 轉動M.C.選擇電台。 ! 裝置有iOS 5.0以上。
4 S.Rtrv指示器
! DATE-您可依建立項目的日期順序排序清單 7 按M.C.以選擇。
在數位音樂修補功能開啟時出現。
建立新電台。
5 歌曲時間(進程欄) 中的項目 如為智慧型手機使用者
! 您也可以按住 切換至New station。
6 播放時間指示器 ! 該裝置擁有Android OS 2.3或以上版本。
變更隨機播放或電台
Pause(暫停) ! 該裝置支援Bluetooth SPP(序列埠設定檔)
1 轉動M.C.。
及A2DP(進階音訊分配設定檔)。
40 Zhtw
<QRD3230-A>40
Black plate (41,1)
使用本機 使用本機 02
中文
! 先鋒對於因不正確或錯誤的App內容導致的 1 按M.C.可暫停或繼續播放。 調整的等化器曲線設定會儲存在Custom1或Cus-
問題概不負責。 2 3 4 5 tom2中。
! 支援應用程式的內容及功能由App提供業者 Sound Retriever(數位音樂修補)
! 各來源可分別設定Custom1。不過,以下所有
負責。 DEH-X9650SD/DEH-X7650SD
組合都會自動設為相同的設定。
1 1 按M.C.選擇所需設定。
! USB、iPod、SD、Pandora(iPhone)及
1-2-OFF(關閉)
開始供iPhone使用者使用的程序 App(iPhone)
1對低壓縮率有影響,而2則對高壓縮率有影
! BT Audio、Pandora(智慧型手機)及
1 將iPhone接至USB連接線。 響。
App(智慧型手機)
! Custom2是所有來源常用的共用設定。
2 在APP CONNECT MODE中選擇Wired。 如
1 按M.C.顯示設定模式。
需詳細資料,請參閱第44頁上 2 4 5 3 音訊調整 2 按下M.C.可在下列項目之間切換:
APP CONNECT MODE(APP連接模式設定)。
等化器波段-等化器位準
若使用DEH-X9650SD和DEH-X7650SD,請繼續進 1 應用程式名稱
3 轉動M.C.選擇所需的設定。
行下一步。 2 PLAY/PAUSE指示器
等化器波段: 100Hz-315Hz-1.25kHz-
3 S.Rtrv指示器 3.15kHz-8kHz
3 將來源切換至App。 在數位音樂修補功能開啟時出現。 等化器位準: +6 至 –6
4 歌曲時間(進程欄)
4 啟動iPhone上的應用程式並開始播放。 5 播放時間指示器 1 按M.C.顯示主選單。 Loudness(響度)
2 轉動M.C.可變更選單選項,且按下可選擇 響度可在低音量時補償低頻及高頻範圍中的不
開始供智慧型手機使用者使用的程序 選擇曲目 足。
1 轉動LEVER。
AUDIO。
僅適用於DEH-X9650BT及DEH-X8650BT 1 按M.C.顯示設定模式。
快速前進或快速倒轉 3 轉動M.C.選擇音訊功能。 2 按M.C.可開關響度。
1 使用藍牙無線技術連接智慧型手機與本機。 1 向左或右轉動並按住LEVER。 3 轉動M.C.選擇所需的設定。
選擇後即可調整下列音訊功能。
如需詳細資料,請參閱第38頁上連接選單操 Low(低)-Mid(中)-High(高)
! 重低音揚聲器輸出開啟後,即可調整截止頻
作。 暫停播放
率及輸出電平。 Subwoofer1(重低音揚聲器開/關設定)
1 按BAND/ 可暫停或繼續播放。
! 來源選擇FM後,將無法使用SLA。
2 在APP CONNECT MODE中選擇Bluetooth 本機配備可開關的重低音揚聲器輸出。
。 如需詳細資料,請參閱第44頁上 1 按M.C.顯示設定模式。
APP CONNECT MODE(APP連接模式設定)。
切換顯示幕 Fader/Balance(淡化器/平衡調整)
2 按M.C.可開啟或關閉重低音揚聲器輸出。
選擇所需的文字資訊 3 轉動M.C.可選擇重低音揚聲器輸出的相位。
1 按M.C.顯示設定模式。
3 將來源切換至App。 向左轉動M.C.選擇相反相位,然後Reverse出
% 按 /DISP。 2 按M.C.可切換淡化(前/後)和平衡(左/
右)。 現在顯示幕中。向右轉動M.C.選擇正常相位,
4 啟動智慧電話上的應用程式並開始播放。 然後Normal出現在顯示幕中。
3 轉動M.C.調整前置/後置揚聲器平衡。
功能設定
轉動M.C.可調整左/右揚聲器平衡。 Subwoofer2(重低音揚聲器調整)
1 按M.C.顯示主選單。
Preset EQ(等化器調用)
Zhtw 41
<QRD3230-A>41
Black plate (42,1)
02 使用本機 使用本機
42 Zhtw
<QRD3230-A>42
Black plate (43,1)
使用本機 使用本機 02
MIXTRAX選單 ! 音效設定可從下列任一選單中變更: 註
閃爍色彩及MIXTRAX特殊效果顯示畫面會隨聲音及
低音音量的變更而變化。
LOOP EFFECT、Flanger EFFECT、 在來源選擇iPod後將無法使用
Echo EFFECT、Crush EFFECT及 Flanger EFFECT、Crush EFFECT及
1 按M.C.顯示設定模式。
Crossfade EFFECT。 Crossfade EFFECT。
2 轉動M.C.選擇所需的設定。
! Sound Level Mode Color 1至Color 6 - 閃
1 顯示MIX Settings。
爍模式會根據音量變更。選擇所需的模
系統選單
1 按M.C.顯示主選單。 式。
2 按下M.C.可顯示功能選單。
! Low Pass Mode Color 1至Color 6 - 閃爍
中文
2 轉動M.C.可變更選單選項,且按下可選擇 模式會根據低音音量變更。選擇所需的模
3 轉動M.C.選擇功能。
MIXTRAX。 式。
選擇後即可調整下列功能。
! Flashing Color Random - 閃爍模式會根
3 轉動M.C.以選擇MIXTRAX功能。 據音量模式及低通模式隨機變更。
MIX Fixed(MIXTRAX音效) 按M.C.顯示主選單。
選擇後即可調整下列MIXTRAX功能。開啟MIX- ! Sound Level Mode Random - 閃爍模式 1
TRAX時即啟用該功能。 會根據音量模式隨機變更。 固定聲音可自MIXTRAX音效中移除。
! Low Pass Mode Random - 閃爍模式會根 1 按M.C.選擇所需設定。 2 轉動M.C.可變更選單選項,且按下可選擇
SHORT PLAYBACK(簡短播放模式) 據低通模式隨機變更。 ON(固定聲音及音效)-OFF(音效) SYSTEM。
Zhtw 43
<QRD3230-A>43
Black plate (44,1)
02 使用本機 使用本機
選擇適合您連接裝置的選項。 3 轉動M.C.可變更選單選項,且按下可選擇
1 按M.C.顯示設定模式。
1 按M.C.選擇所需設定。 SYSTEM。
2 轉動M.C.可調整對比度。
Wired(適用於iPhone)-Bluetooth(適用於
0至15隨著電平增大或減小而顯示。
智慧型手機) 4 轉動M.C.選擇系統選單功能。
Ever-scroll(捲動模式設定) ! 來源設為Pandora或App後將無法使用此設 如需詳細資料,請參閱第43頁上系統選單。
定。
44 Zhtw
<QRD3230-A>44
Black plate (45,1)
使用本機 安裝 02
03
使用AUX播放來源 連接 — 請勿將纜線置於活動部件上,比如排檔桿與
座位扶手。
1 將立體聲迷你插頭插入AUX輸入插孔。 — 請勿將纜線置於受熱位置,比如暖風機出口
警告
附近。
! 使用超過50 W(輸出值)與介於4 W 至8 W
2 按SRC/OFF選擇AUX作為播放來源。 — 請勿將黃色纜線穿過引擎室的孔連接至電
(阻抗值)的揚聲器。本機請勿使用1 W
池。
註 至3 W 揚聲器。
— 以絕緣膠帶包覆任何未連接的纜線接頭。
除非開啟輔助設定,否則無法選擇AUX。更多詳 ! 黑色纜線為接地。安裝本機或功率放大器
— 請勿縮短纜線長度。
情請參閱第44頁上AUX(輔助輸入)。 (另售)時,請確實優先連接接地線。確定
中文
— 切勿為了與其他裝置共用電源而割開本機電
接地線已正確連接至車輛本體的金屬部位。
源線絕緣層。纜線的電流負載量有一定限
功率放大器的接地線及本機或其他裝置,必
度。
開啟或關閉顯示幕 須以不同的螺絲分別連接車輛。若接地線的
— 請使用規定額定值的保險絲。
螺絲鬆動或掉落,可能會導致起火、冒煙或
% 按住MIX/DISP OFF直至顯示幕開啟或關 — 請勿將揚聲器負極線直接接地。
故障。
閉。 — 請勿將多個揚聲器的負極線綑紮在一起。
! 當本機電源開啟時,控制訊號會透過藍/白
色纜線輸出。請將其連接至外部功率放大器
若出現不需要的顯示畫面 系統遙控器或車輛的自動天線中繼控制端子
利用下列程序關閉不需要的顯示畫面。 (最大300 mA 12 V DC)。若車輛配備有玻璃
天線,請將其連接至天線增強電源端子。
+2
1 按M.C.顯示主選單。 ! 切勿將藍/白纜線連接到外部的變壓電源端
子。同時,請避免將其連接到自動天線的電
2 轉動M.C.可變更選單選項,且按下可選擇 源端子。這麼做可能會導致電源電量耗盡或
SYSTEM。 故障。
+2 ڼໂᏁ
3 轉動M.C.以顯示DEMO OFF,然後再按下來 本機
選取。 重要事項
6
! 當本機安裝在點火開關沒有ACC(附加)位
4 轉動M.C.以切換至YES。 置的車輛中時,若無法將紅色纜線連接可以 1 23 45 7 8
偵測點火開關運作的端子上,可能會導致電
5 按M.C.以選擇。 池電量耗盡。
F O
OF
N
ba 9
STAR
T
ACC位置 無ACC位置
! 本機限使用12伏特電池與負接地。不這麼做 c
可能會導致起火或故障。
! 為防止短路,過熱或故障發生,請務必遵守
下列指示。
1 天線輸入15 cm
— 安裝之前請斷開電池的負極。
2 保險絲(10 A)
— 以纜線夾或膠帶固定纜線。請使用膠帶包覆
3 電源線輸入
纜線與金屬部位接觸的部分以保護纜線。
4 有線遙控輸入
Zhtw 45
<QRD3230-A>45
Black plate (46,1)
03 安裝 安裝
e 黑(機身接地)
連接到乾淨、無塗料的金屬部位。
1 系統遙控器
黃
5cm
cm
f
連接至藍色/白色纜線。
連接到固定的12 V電源端子。
2 功率放大器(另售)
g 紅
3 以RCA纜線連接(另售)
連接到由點火開關(12 V DC)控制的端子。
4 至後置輸出 DIN前/後座
h 藍/白
5 後置揚聲器
連接到功率放大器的系統控制端子或自動天 本機可使用前座或後座安裝進行正確安裝。
6 至前置輸出
線中繼控制端子(最大300 mA 12 V DC)。 安裝時,請使用市售零件。
7 前置揚聲器
i 橙色/白色
8 至重低音揚聲器輸出
連接亮起的開關端子。
9 重低音揚聲器
j 重低音揚聲器(4 W)
46 Zhtw
<QRD3230-A>46
Black plate (47,1)
安裝 安裝 03
1 將座套插入儀表板中。 1 取下飾環。
將麥克風安裝在遮陽板上時
在狹窄空間中安裝時,請使用隨附的座套。若
有足夠的空間,請使用車輛隨附的座套。 1 將麥克風導線安裝在溝槽中。
2 使用螺絲起子折彎金屬突出部位(90°)至 2
定位,藉以固定座套。 1 3
中文
1
1 麥克風
1 飾環 2 麥克風夾
2 缺口突出部位 3 麥克風座
2
! 拆下前面板後,可更輕易的進入飾環。
! 若您要重新裝上飾環,請對準有向下缺口突 2 將麥克風安裝在方向盤轉向機柱上。
2 1 麥克風導線
出部位的側邊並接上飾環。
2 溝槽
1 儀表板 2 將隨附的抽取鑰匙插入本機的兩側,使其卡 1
2 將麥克風夾安裝在遮陽板上。
2 座套
至定位。
將遮陽板立起來,再安裝麥克風夾。(降低遮陽
# 確認本機已確實安裝至定位。安裝不確實可能會 板將減低語音辨識率。)
造成跳動或其他故障。 3 將本機拉出儀表板。
2
DIN後座
1 選定適當的位置,讓托架孔與本機側面密
1
合。
1 雙面膠
2 將麥克風安裝在方向盤轉向機柱的後側。
拆下並重新安裝前面板 調整麥克風角度
您可拆下前面板以防止本機遭竊。
如需詳細資料,請參閱第32頁上安裝前面板。
2 鎖緊各邊的兩顆螺絲。
1 麥克風夾
安裝麥克風
3 僅適用於DEH-X9650BT及DEH-X8650BT 將麥克風安裝在方向盤轉向機柱上時
1
1 拆下麥克風夾的麥克風底座。
若要卸下麥克風夾的麥克風座,請滑動麥克風
注意
2 座。
讓麥克風纏繞方向盤或排檔桿非常危險。請確
定以此方式安裝本機時,不會阻礙駕駛車輛。
1 十字槽螺絲(5 mm × 8 mm)
2 托架 註
3 儀表板或操縱台 ! 將麥克風安裝在可讓人以語音操作系統的位
置。
Zhtw 47
<QRD3230-A>47
Black plate (48,1)
附錄
附加資訊 附加資訊
48 Zhtw
<QRD3230-A>48
Black plate (49,1)
附錄
附加資訊 附加資訊
中文
iPod故障。
中斷與iPod纜線的連接。iPod主選單顯示後,重 Can’t Play
新連接iPod並重設。 Pandora
No Active Stations 操作已停用。
ERROR-19 未選擇電台。 在其他電台上執行相同的命令。
ERROR-23 選擇電台。
通訊失敗。
USB儲存裝置未格式化為FAT12、FAT16或FAT32檔案 中斷與iPod纜線的連接。iPod主選單顯示後,重
系統。 新連接iPod並重設。 No BT device. Go to BT MENU to register. 應用程式
USB儲存裝置應該格式化為FAT12,FAT16或FAT32
找不到藍牙裝置。
檔案系統。 No BT device. Go to BT MENU to register.
Start up the Pandora Application 依照畫面上的指示操作。
Pandora應用程式尚未開始執行。 找不到藍牙裝置。
ERROR-60 依照畫面上的指示操作。
從iPhone啟動Pandora應用程式。 BT error. Press BAND key to retry.
資料庫無法儲存。
藍牙連線失敗。
執行下列其中一項操作。 BT error. Press BAND key to retry.
Can’t operate 依照畫面上的指示操作。
-將點火開關轉到OFF,然後再轉回ON。 藍牙連線失敗。
操作已停用。
-將來源轉到OFF,然後再轉回ON。 依照畫面上的指示操作。
在其他曲目上執行相同的命令。 Check Pandora. Press BAND key to retry.
-中斷連接USB儲存裝置。
無法連線至Pandora應用程式。
Try again later 依照畫面上的指示操作。 Check your App. Press BAND key to retry.
ERROR-16
通訊失敗。 無法連線至應用程式。
iPod韌體版本過時。 依照畫面上的指示操作。
請稍後再試一次。 Start up Pandora. Press BAND key to retry.
更新iPod版本。
無法連線至Pandora應用程式。
iPod故障。 Start up and play your Application.
Skip limit reached 依照畫面上的指示操作。
中斷與iPod纜線的連接。iPod主選單顯示後,重 應用程式尚未開始執行。
到達跳躍限制。
新連接iPod並重設。 依照畫面上的指示操作。
! 請勿超過跳躍限制。 Disconnected.Press BAND key to retry.
! 由於音樂聆聽的限制,Pandora 會限制每小時 藍牙連線遺失。
STOP
跳過的總數。 依照畫面上的指示操作。
目前清單中無歌曲。
選擇含有歌曲的清單。 Check Application Stations Full Can’t be Created
不支援Pandora應用程式的版本。 無法新增電台。
Not found
連接已安裝相容Pandora應用程式版本的 刪除舊電台以開啟新電台。
無相關歌曲。 iPhone。
傳送歌曲至iPod。
未登入。 Can’t Be Deleted
登入您的帳戶。 電台無法刪除。
在其他電台上執行相同的命令。
Zhtw 49
<QRD3230-A>49
Black plate (50,1)
附錄
附加資訊 附加資訊
50 Zhtw
<QRD3230-A>50
Black plate (51,1)
附錄
附加資訊 附加資訊
中文
(USB、SD)中。
Multi Media記憶卡(MMC)沒有相容性。 含Lightning接頭的iPod使用者應使用Lightning
只能顯示前32個字元作為檔案名稱(包括副檔 但您是否可指定播放的順序,將視系統環境而
名)或資料夾名稱。 本機不保證與所有SD記憶卡的相容性。 轉USB連接線(iPod隨附)。 定。
含Dock接頭的iPod使用者應使用CD-IU51。如需詳 USB可攜式音訊播放器的播放順序不同且視播放
本機可能會因使用將WMA檔案編碼的應用程式,而 本機與SD-Audio不相容。
細資料,請洽詢您的經銷商。 器而定。
無法正常運作。
開始播放嵌入影像資料的音訊檔案,或儲存在有 關於檔案/格式相容性,請參閱iPod操作手冊。
大量資料夾層級USB儲存裝置上的音訊檔案時,可 注意 藍牙設定檔
有聲書、播客: 相容
能會有些微延遲。 ! 若USB隨身碟/USB可攜式音訊播放器/SD記憶 為了使用藍牙無線技術,裝置必須能解譯某些
卡/SDHC記憶卡的資料遺失,即使發生在使 設定檔。本機與下列設定檔相容。
用本機時,先鋒概不負責。 ! GAP(一般存取設定檔)
碟片 ! 先鋒不保證本產品與所有USB大量儲存裝置 注意
! OPP(物件推送設定檔)
的相容性,對於使用本產品時導致媒體播放 對於iPod數據的遺失,即使發生在使用本機
! HFP(免持設定檔)1.5
可播放的資料夾階層: 最多八層(實際的階層少 機、智慧型手機或其他裝置上遺失的資料概 時,先鋒概不負責。
! PBAP(電話簿存取設定檔)
於兩層)。 不負責。 ! A2DP(進階音訊分配設定檔)
可播放的資料夾: 最多99 音訊檔案順序 ! AVRCP(音訊/視訊遙控器設定檔)1.3
! SPP(序列埠設定檔)1.1
可播放的檔案: 最多999 iPod相容性 使用者無法使用本機指定資料夾編號和播放順
檔案系統: ISO 9660 Level 1及2、Romeo、Joliet 本機僅支援下列iPod機型。 序。
Made for 階層實例
版權及商標
多區段播放: 相容 ! iPod touch(第五代)
01 藍牙
封包寫入資料傳送: 不相容 ! iPod touch(第四代)
02 Bluetoothâ字標和商標為Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
! iPod touch(第三代) 1
無論原始錄製歌曲之間空白部分的長短,壓縮音 所有,日本先鋒公司使用這些標誌皆需獲得授
! iPod touch(第二代) 2
訊碟片播放時歌曲之間都會出現短暫的暫停。 權。其他商標和商品名稱分屬其各自的擁有者
! iPod touch(第一代) 03 所有。
! iPod classic 3
:資料夾
! iPod with video 04 4
外部儲存裝置(USB、SD) 5 : 壓縮音訊檔案 iTunes
! iPod nano(第七代)
6 01至05: 資料夾編 Apple及iTunes均是Apple Inc.於美國及其他國
! iPod nano(第六代)
可播放的資料夾階層: 最多八層(實際的階層少 05 號 家註冊的商標。
! iPod nano(第五代)
於兩層)。 1至6: 播放順序
! iPod nano(第四代)
可播放的資料夾:最多1 500 ! iPod nano(第三代)
! iPod nano(第二代) 碟片
可播放的檔案: 最多15 000
! iPod nano(第一代) 資料夾選擇順序或其他操作可能會因編碼或寫
播放有版權保護的檔案: 不相容 ! iPhone 5 入軟體而異。
Zhtw 51
<QRD3230-A>51
Black plate (52,1)
附錄
附加資訊 附加資訊
52 Zhtw
<QRD3230-A>52
Black plate (53,1)
附錄
附加資訊
AM調諧器
頻率範圍 ......................... 531 kHz至1 602 kHz(9 kHz)
530 kHz至1 640 kHz(10 kHz)
可用靈敏度 ...................... 25 µV(S/N: 20 dB)
訊噪比 ............................. 62 dB(IEC-A網路)
中文
藍牙
(DEH-X9650BT/DEH-X8650BT)
版本 ................................ 經過認證的藍牙3.0
輸出功率 ......................... 最大+4 dBm
(功率等級2)
註
規格與設計可能改變,恕不另行通知。
Zhtw 53
<QRD3230-A>53
)Black plate (106,1
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ
ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ AM
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ٥٣١ ......................ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ١٦٠٢ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )٩
ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(
٥٣٠ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ١٦٤٠ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ
) ١٠ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(
ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ 25 ..........ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻟﺖ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ٢٠ :ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(
ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ٦٢ ........ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ )ﺷﺒﻜﺔ (IEC-A
Bluetooth
)(DEH-X8650BT/DEH-X9650BT
ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ٣٫٠ Bluetooth .............................ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ
ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ .................ﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ٤+ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻡ
)ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ (٢
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ.
٥١ Ar
<QRD3230-A>54
)Black plate (105,1
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ
ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ CD ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ”ﺻﻨﻊ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ “iPodﻭ”ﺻﻨﻊ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ “iPhoneﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ
ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ................................ ﺼﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ iPodﺃﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﺧﺼﻴ ً
ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ........... ﻋﺎﻡ iPhoneﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ،ﻭﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺼﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻔﺎﺀ Bluetooth
٩٤ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ) ١ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ( )ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ........ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮ ١٤٫٤ ................ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ â
ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ Apple. Appleﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ Bluetoothﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ Bluetooth
(IEC-A )ﻣﺪﻯ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ :ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻘﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ .ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻠﻚ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
) ٢ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ( ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ .......................... ١٢٫٠ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﻰ ١٤٫٤ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ(
ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ................. MP3
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﻣﻊ iPodﺃﻭ iPhoneﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ. ﻭﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ PIONEER
MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ .......................ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻟﺐ
ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ٧ﻭ ٧.١ﻭ ٨ﻭ ٩ﻭ ١٠ﻭ ١١ﻭ١٢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ............... WMA ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ١٠٫٠ .......ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ
CORPORATIONﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ .ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ
)ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺘﺎﻥ( ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻃﻮﻝ × ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ(: Androidä & Google Play ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺨﺺ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ.
)(Windows Media Player DIN Androidﻭ Google Playﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ
) AACﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ iTunesﻓﻘﻂ( )(.m4a ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ .. MPEG-4 AAC ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ١٧٨ ................................ﻣﻢ × ٥٠ﻣﻢ × ١٦٥ﻣﻢ Google Inc. iTunes
)ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ١٠٫٧ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ( ﺍﻟﻤﻘ ّﺪﻣﺔ ١٨٨ ...............................ﻣﻢ × ٥٨ﻣﻢ × ١٧ﻣﻢ Appleﻭ iTunesﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ،Apple Inc.
Linear PCM & MS ADPCM ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ................. WAV )(DEH-X9650SD/DEH-X9650BT ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ®Pandora ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ( ﺍﻟﻤﻘ ّﺪﻣﺔ ١٨٨ ...............................ﻣﻢ × ٥٨ﻣﻢ × ١٨ﻣﻢ
PANDORAﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ PANDORAﻭﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻟـ
)(DEH-X7650SD/DEH-X8650BT
D
Pandoraﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ MP3
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
USB ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ١٧٨ ................................ﻣﻢ × ٥٠ﻣﻢ × ١٦٥ﻣﻢ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ Pandora Media, Incﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺫﻥ. ﺗﻮﺭﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ
USB 2.0ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ USBﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ........... ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺿﻤﻨًﻴﺎ ﺃﻱ ﺣﻖ
ﺍﻟﻤﻘ ّﺪﻣﺔ ١٧٠ ...............................ﻣﻢ × ٤٦ﻣﻢ × ١٧ﻣﻢ
١ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻹﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ........... MIXTRAX ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺚ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ )ﺃﻱ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺇﻳﺮﺍ ًﺩﺍ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ
)(DEH-X9650SD/DEH-X9650BT
) MSCﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ( ﻓﺌﺔ ........................... USB
ﺍﻟﻤﻘ ّﺪﻣﺔ ١٧٠ ...............................ﻣﻢ × ٤٦ﻣﻢ × ١٨ﻣﻢ MIXTRAXﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ PIONEER ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ )ﺃﺭﺿﻲ ،ﻓﻀﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( ﻭﻻ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ/
FAT12, FAT16, FAT32 ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ .........................
MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ................. MP3
)(DEH-X7650SD/DEH-X8650BT CORPORATION. ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ،ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ١٫١ ................................ﻛﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻴﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻣﺜﻞ
ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ٧ﻭ ٧.١ﻭ ٨ﻭ ٩ﻭ ١٠ﻭ ١١ﻭ١٢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ............... WMA
)ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺘﺎﻥ( ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ .ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺜﻞ
)(Windows Media Player ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ
) AACﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ iTunesﻓﻘﻂ( )(.m4a ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ .. MPEG-4 AAC ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ٥٠ ................ﻭﺍﺕ × ٤ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ
)ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ١٠٫٧ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ( ٧٠ﻭﺍﺕ × ١/٢ﺃﻭﻡ )ﻟﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( .http://www.mp3licensing.com
Linear PCM & MS ADPCM ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ................. WAV ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ٢٢ .................ﻭﺍﺕ × ) ٤ﻣﻦ ٥٠ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ١٥٠٠٠
)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ( ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ،ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻛﻠﻲ ٪ ٥ﺣﻤﻮﻟﺔ ٤ WMA
ﺃﻭﻡ ،ﻣﻊ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻛﻠﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ(
Windows Mediaﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ
ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ......................ﻣﻦ ٤ﺃﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ٨ﺃﻭﻡ × ٤
SD ٤ﺃﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ٨ﺃﻭﻡ × ٢ + ٢ﺃﻭﻡ × ١ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ Microsoft Corporationﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ
ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ 2.00 ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ............. ﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻲ
٣٢ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﻭ(SDHC ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .......... ٤٫٠ ...................................ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ Microsoft
FAT12, FAT16, FAT32 ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ......................... ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ ٥ﺣﺰﻣﺔ(: Corporationﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ
MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ................. MP3 ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ١١٠ ................................ﻫﺮﺗﺰ٣١٥ /ﻫﺮﺗﺰ١.٢١ /ﻫﺮﺗﺰ/
ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ٧ﻭ ٧.١ﻭ ٨ﻭ ٩ﻭ ١٠ﻭ ١١ﻭ١٢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ............... WMA
ﺷﺮﻛﺔ .Microsoft Licensing, Inc
٣.١٥ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ٥/ﻫﺮﺗﺰ
)ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺘﺎﻥ(
ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺐ ١٢± ...............................ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ
)(Windows Media Player ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ SD
:HPF
) AACﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ iTunesﻓﻘﻂ( )(.m4a ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ .. MPEG-4 AAC ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ٥٠ ................................ﻫﺮﺗﺰ٦٣ /ﻫﺮﺗﺰ٨٠ /ﻫﺮﺗﺰ١٠٠ /ﻫﺮﺗﺰ/ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ SDﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ .SD-3C, LLC
)ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ١٠٫٧ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ( ١٢٥ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ miniSDﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ .SD-3C, LLC
Linear PCM & MS ADPCM ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ................. WAV ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ -١٢ ................................ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ/ﺃﻭﻛﺘﺎﻑ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ microSDﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ .SD-3C, LLC
)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ( ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(: ﺷﻌﺎﺭ SDHCﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ .SD-3C, LLC
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ٥٠ ................................ﻫﺮﺗﺰ٦٣ /ﻫﺮﺗﺰ٨٠ /ﻫﺮﺗﺰ١٠٠ /ﻫﺮﺗﺰ/
ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ FM ١٢٥ﻫﺮﺗﺰ iPod & iPhone
ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ١٨– ................................ﺩﻳﺴﺒﻞ/ﺃﻭﻛﺘﺎﻑ
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ٨٧.٥ ......................ﻡ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ١٠٨.٠ﻡ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ iPhoneﻭ iPodﻭ iPod classicﻭ iPod nanoﻭiPod
ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺐ ...............................ﻣﻦ ٦+ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ – ٢٤ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ
ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ٩ .............ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻑ ) ٠٫٨ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻟﺖ ٧٥/ﺃﻭﻡ، touchﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ Apple Inc.ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭ ................................ﻋﺎﺩﻱ/ﻋﻜﺴﻲ
ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ،ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ 30 :ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ( ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ:
ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺐ ...............................ﻣﻦ ١٢+ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ٠ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ Lightningﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ Apple Inc.
ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ٧٢ ........ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ )ﺷﺒﻜﺔ (IEC-A
Ar ٥٠
<QRD3230-A>55
)Black plate (104,1
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ) iPod nanoﺍﻟﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ( ! ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )(SD، USB ! ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ .USB MTP
) iPod nanoﺍﻟﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ( !
02 ) iPod nanoﺍﻟﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ( ! ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ AAC
1 ) iPod nanoﺍﻟﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ( ! )ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺒﻘﺘﻴﻦ(.
2 ) iPod nanoﺍﻟﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ( ! ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ :ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ AACﺍﻟﻤﺸ ّﻔﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ iTunes
03 ) iPod nanoﺍﻟﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ( ! ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﺣﺘﻰ ١٥٠٠
ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ.m4a :
3 ) iPod nanoﺍﻟﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ( ! ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﺣﺘﻰ ١٥٠٠٠
04 4
iPhone 5 ! ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ١١.٠٢٥ :ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ٤٨ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ
5
iPhone 4S ! ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ :ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ
:ﻣﺠﻠﺪ 6
ﻣﻌ ّﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ١٦ :ﻙ ﺏ/ﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ٣٢٠ﻙ ﺏ/ﺙVBR ،
:ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ 05
iPhone 4 ! ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻘﺴﻢ ) :(USB، SDﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ
٠١ﺇﻟﻰ :٠٥ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ iPhone 3GS ! ﻓﻘﻂ. :Apple Losslessﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ
1ﺇﻟﻰ :6ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
iPhone 3G !
iPhone ! ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ AACﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ iTunes Store
USBﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ. )ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ :(.m4pﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ
ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ،ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺒ ًﻌﺎ ﻟﺠﻴﻞ iPodﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﻩ.
ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ
ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ. ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ SD ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻴﺔ
.iPod
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )(SD، USB ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ).(MMC ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻝ ٣٢ﺣﺮ ًﻓﺎ ﻛﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ )ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ
ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ iPodﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ
ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ.
) Lightning to USBﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ .(iPod ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ SDﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻥ.
).(SD، USB ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺒ ًﻌﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻲ
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ iPodﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ Dock Connectorﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ .SD-Audio
ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ .WMA
1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ .CD-IU51ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 001xxx.mp3 ،ﻭ.(099yyy.mp3 ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ/ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ,ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ .iPod
2ﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ. ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ
3ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ،ﻣﻠﻒ :Podcastﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ.
! ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤ ّﻤﻞ Pioneerﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ
).(SD، USB
/USBﺍﻟﻤﺸ ّﻐﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨّﻘﺎﻟﺔ /USBﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ SD/
ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺗﺒ ًﻌﺎ ﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ،ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
SDHCﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﻟﻮ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ. ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ
ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ،USBﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ! ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ Pioneerﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ.
ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤ ّﻤﻞ Pioneerﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ُﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ iPod ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ
ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺒﻘﺘﻴﻦ(.
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ Bluetooth ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﺣﺘﻰ ٩٩
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ Bluetoothﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ .ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ
ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ iPod ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﺣﺘﻰ ٩٩٩
ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ISO 9660 :ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ١ﻭ Romeo ،٢ﻭJoliet
ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ. ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻃﺮﺯ iPodﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ.
! ) GAPﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺎﻡ(
ﺻﻨﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ
! ) OPPﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺴﺎﺕ :ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ
! ) iPod touchﺍﻟﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ(
! ) HFPﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ( ١٫٥
! ) iPod touchﺍﻟﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ( ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ :ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ
! ) PBAPﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ(
! ) iPod touchﺍﻟﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ(
! ) A2DPﺑﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ( ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ،
! ) iPod touchﺍﻟﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ(
! ) AVRCPﺑﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ/ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ١٫٣ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ
! ) iPod touchﺍﻟﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ(
! ) SPPﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ( ١٫١ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺎﺕ.
! iPod classic
! iPodﺑﻘﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ
٤٩ Ar
<QRD3230-A>56
)Black plate (103,1
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ
ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ
ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ SD ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻬﺎ ،ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ .ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ/ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ) (SD، USBﺃﻭ iPod ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ SDﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ
ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﻜًﻨﺎ ،ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ .ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻚ
! SD ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ.
! miniSD ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ.
ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭًﻳﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ! microSD
ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ.
! SDHC
)ﻗﺮﺹ(SD، USB ، ! ﻗﺪ ﺗﻠﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ! ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ،
WMA ،SDﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻃﺒﻴًﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ. ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ.
ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ.wma : ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ SDﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺟﺴﻢ
ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ.
ﻣﻌ ّﺪﻝ ﺍﻟِﺒﺖ ٤٨ :ﻙ ﺏ/ﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ٣٢٠ﻙ ﺏ/ﺙ )ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ِﺑﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ (CBR
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )(SD، USB
، ٤٨ﻙ ﺏ/ﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ٣٨٤ﻙ ﺏ/ﺙ )ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ِﺑﺖ ﻣﺘﻐّﻴﺮ (VBR ﻻ ُﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ SDﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SDﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﺎ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ١٢ﺳﻢ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍ ً
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ،ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ) (SD، USBﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ٣٢ :ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ٤٤٫١ ،ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ٤٨ ،ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﻄ ًﻼ. ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ.
Windows Mediaä Audio ProfessionalﻭLossless ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ miniSDﺃﻭ ،microSDﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳًﺌﺎ .ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺑﻨﺎ ًﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ) ،(SD، USBﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ:
ﻭ Stream/DRM Stream/Voiceﻣﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ :ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ. ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ! ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ DualDiscs
! ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ! ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ٨ﺳﻢ :ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ
ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ )ﻣﺜ ًﻼ :ﻣﻠﺘﻮﻳﺔ ،ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﻣﺘﻘﺸﺮ( ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ.
! ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
MP3 ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ.
! ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. ! ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ
ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ SDﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ
ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ.mp3 :
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ.
ﻣﻌ ّﺪﻝ ﺍﻟِﺒﺖ ٨ :ﻙ ﺏ/ﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ٣٢٠ﻙ ﺏ/ﺙ )ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ِﺑﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ،(CBR
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USB
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،SDﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ! ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ CD
ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ِﺑﺖ ﻣﺘﻐّﻴﺮ VBR ! ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ ،ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺸﻘﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺪﻭﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ
ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ .ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ USBﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ.
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ٨ :ﻙ ﻫـ ﺇﻟﻰ ٤٨ﻙ ﻫـ ) ٣٢ﻙ ﻫـ ٤٤٫١ ،ﻙ ﻫـ ٤٨ ،ﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﻣﺴﺒﺒ ًﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ. ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻮﻫﺔ
ﻻ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ .USB ! ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ CD-R/RWﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ
ﻫـ ﻟﻺﺑﺮﺍﺯ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻗﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ،ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩﺓ.
ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ .ﻻ ﺗﺪﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ.
ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻴﻎ ﻻﺣﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ID3 Tagﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ،1.1 ،1.0 :
USBﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ُﻳﺤﺘﺠﺰ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺩﻭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻣﻞ
) 2.4 ،2.3 ،2.2ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﺻﺪﺍﺭ 2.xﻣﻦ ﻻﺣﻘﺔ iPod ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ.
ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ID3 Tagﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ (.1.x
ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﺼﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ
ﺛﺒﺖ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ iPodﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ .ﻻ ﺗﺪﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ iPodﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻨﺎ ًﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ،USBﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ :M3uﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﻴﻤﺎﻭﻳﺔ.
ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﺒﺲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺩﻭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ. ! ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻤﻌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ.
MP3) MP3iﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ( :mp3 PRO ،ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻗﺮﺹ ،CDﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ
ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ iPod
ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ.
! ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ،iPodﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ( EQ
WAV ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ iPodﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ. ﻗﺪ ﻳﻀﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ .ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ
ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ،iPodﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ EQﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻓﺄ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳًﺒﺎ .ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ
ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ.wav : ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ. ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ.
! ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ iPodﻋﻨﺪ
ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤ ّﻲ ٨ :ﻭ(MS ADPCM) ٤ ،(LPCM) ١٦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ .ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋًﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻤﻜًﻨﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ
ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ iPodﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻭﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ.
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ١٦ :ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ٤٨ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ (LPCM)، ٢٢٫٠٥
ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻭ ٤٤٫١ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )(MS ADPCM ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﻓﻲ iPodﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ.
ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ.
Ar ٤٨
<QRD3230-A>57
)Black plate (102,1
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ
ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ FAT12ﺃﻭ FAT16ﺃﻭ
No BT device. Go to BT MENU to register. ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ .iPodﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ .FAT32
ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ
،iPodﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ. ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ FAT12ﺃﻭ FAT16ﺃﻭ
ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ .Bluetooth
No BT device. Go to BT MENU to register. ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
.FAT32
ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ .Bluetooth Start up the Pandora Application
ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ERROR-60
BT error. Press BAND key to retry. ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ Pandoraﺑﻌﺪ.
ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ Pandoraﻣﻦ .iPhone ﻓﺸﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ.
ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ .Bluetooth
BT error. Press BAND key to retry. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ .Bluetooth Can’t operate –ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ.
ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. –ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
Check Pandora. Press BAND key to retry. ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ.
–ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ .USB
ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ .Pandora ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ.
Check your App. Press BAND key to retry. ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ERROR-16
ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ. Try again later
ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ iPodﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻗﺪﻳ ًﻤﺎ.
Start up Pandora. Press BAND key to retry. ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ .iPod
ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ .Pandora ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ.
Start up and play your Application. ﺇﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ .iPod
ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ. Skip limit reached ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ .iPodﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ،iPodﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ.
Disconnected.Press BAND key to retry. ﺗﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ.
ﺗﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ .Bluetooth ! ﻻ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ.
STOP
ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ! ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ،ﺗﺤﺪﺩ Pandoraﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ
ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ. ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻏﺎﻥ.
Stations Full Can’t be Created
Check Application
ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. Not found
ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ Pandoraﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ.
ﺻﻞ iPhoneﺑﻪ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ Pandoraﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ. ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻏﺎ ٍﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ.
ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ .iPod
Can’t Be Deleted ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ.
ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
٤٧ Ar
<QRD3230-A>58
)Black plate (101,1
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ
NO AUDIO ERROR-10, 11, 12, 15, 17, 30, A0 ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Bluetoothﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ. ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ
ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺎﺕ. ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ. ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ،Bluetoothﺃﻭ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ
ﺗﻤﺖ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﺑﺨﻂ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﻂ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ،ﻏﻴﺮ
ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ OFFﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ Bluetoothﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ.
ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ
ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ. ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ONﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ،Bluetoothﻭﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ
ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ.
ﺍ ْﺗﺒﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ. ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ .CD Bluetoothﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ .ﺛﻢ ،ﺟﺮﺏ
ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Bluetoothﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
SKIPPED ERROR-15 ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ.
ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ .DRM ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ. ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ٣٠ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨ ّﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ. ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻮﻛﻴﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ
ERROR-23 ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ.
PROTECT ،Pioneerﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ.
ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ .DRM ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ CDﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ. ﺗﻤﺖ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺑﺨﻂ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﻂ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ،ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﻨﺎ ًﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ،ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ
ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ .USB ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ/ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ.
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
NOT COMPATIBLE FORMAT READ
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ USBﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ. ﺃﺣﻴﺎًﻧﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ. ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ.
! ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ .USB ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮًﺗﺎ. ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ) Folder repeatﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ
AMP ERROR
! ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓ ًﻘﺎ. ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(.
NO AUDIO ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ.
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ SDﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ
ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ SDﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺸﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ NO XXXXﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ) ،NO TITLEﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ(.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ
CHECK USB ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ.
SKIPPED Pioneerﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ.
ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ USBﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ .USB ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ/ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ.
ﺻﻞ USBﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺸﻲء ﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ
ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻮ ّ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ .DRM
ERROR
ﺗﺎﻟﻒ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨ ّﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻄﻠﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. ﺛﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ.
PROTECT ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
CHECK USB ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺧﻠﻮﻱ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻤﻌﻲ.
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ .DRM ﺃﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺸﻮﻳ ًﺸﺎ.
ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ. ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ.
ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ CD ﻼ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ .Bluetooth
ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ .ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،OFFﺛﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ACCﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ERROR-07, 11, 12, 17, 30 ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﺎ ٍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ Bluetoothﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ.
،ONﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ. ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )SD، USB)/iPod ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﺘﺴﺦ.
NO DEVICE ﻧ ّﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. ﻫﺎﺗﻒ Bluetoothﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺎﻟًﻴﺎ.
CHECK USB ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ.
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ iPodﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ. ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ.
ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ iPodﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻨﻪ. ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ Bluetoothﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻢ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USB/iPodﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ. ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ.
ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺎﺱ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ) iPodﻛﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ .ﻭﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ،ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ
ﺣﺠﺰﻩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ( .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ،ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻱ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ OFFﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ONﺃﻭ ﺍﻓﺼﻞ FORMAT READ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Bluetoothﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻱ.
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ iPodﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﺃﺣﻴﺎًﻧﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ.
ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮًﺗﺎ.
Ar ٤٦
<QRD3230-A>59
)Black plate (100,1
ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ
1 ! ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ DINﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ
ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ.
ﻓﻚ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻄﻴﺐ. ١ ١ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺟﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ.
ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ .ﻭﻓﻲ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺘﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ
٢ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺟﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﻚ ﻟﺜﻨﻲ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ
2 ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﻳﻒ. ١
) ٩٠ﺩﺭﺟﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ.
3
1
1
1ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ
2ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻄﻴﺐ 1
3ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻟﺴﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﻮﻡ 2
ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻄﻴﺐ. !
ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ. ٢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻄﻴﺐ؛ ﻭ ّﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻮﻡ !
2 2
ﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
1 1ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ٢ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻼ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ
1ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
2ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ.
2ﺟﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ
#ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ .ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ
٢ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ. ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. ٣
ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺨ ٍﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
2 ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ،ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ) .ﻳﻘﻠﻞ
ﺧﻔﺾ ﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ(.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ DINﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ
١ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ
ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ.
1ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ
2ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ. 1
ﻓﻚ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ
ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ.
ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
.٣٠ ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ. ٢
ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ
1ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ 3
ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ DEH-X9650BTﻭDEH-X8650BT 1
٤٥ Ar
<QRD3230-A>60
)Black plate (99,1
ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ kﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ٧٠ﻭﺍﺕ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻀﺔ ﻣﻨﺼﻬﺮ ) ١٠ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ( 2
) ٢ﺃﻭﻡ( ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ. ﺩﺧﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ 3
ﻫﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻔﺴﺠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻔﺴﺠﻴﺔ/ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ. ﺩﺧﻞ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ 4
ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ. ! ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ 1 ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ
L R
ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ! ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍﺀ/ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ. 2 3 )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(.
ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ. lﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ. ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ) DEH-X9650BTﻭDEH- 5
4 6 8
ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺛﻘﺐ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ! mﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻀﺔ ) ٤ﺃﻭﻡ( × ٢ F X8650BTﻓﻘﻂ(
7 9
ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ. ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ) DEH-X9650BTﻭDEH-X8650BT 6
ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: ! ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ
ﻓﻘﻂ(
! ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ,ﻻ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺄﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ j a c
— ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ. ٤ﻡ
ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ. SW
b d
— ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻛﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺊ. ﺧﺮﺝ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ 7
! ﺳﻴﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ .ﻗﻢ ! ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ .ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ S/W control ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ 8
ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻀﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ e k ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ 9
ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺳﺨﺎﻥ. .٤٢ f a c ﻣﻨﻔﺬ USBﺭﻗﻢ DEH-X9650BT) ٢ﻭDEH- a
ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ. g
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
! ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ l m X9650SDﻓﻘﻂ(
h b d
٦٠ﺩﺭﺟﺔ. i ﻣﻨﻔﺬ USBﺭﻗﻢ ١ b
ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ١٫٥ USBﻡ c
60° ﻧﻔﺬ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ. ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ 1
ﻳﺴﺎﺭ 2 ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ
1 3 ﻳﻤﻴﻦ 3 ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ
2 ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ 4
4 ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﻔﻴﻀﺔ.
! ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ 5
5 5 ﺃﺑﻴﺾ 6
ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻚ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺔ 1
L R
ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻠ ّﻒ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺨﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ 3 ﺃﺑﻴﺾ/ﺃﺳﻮﺩ 7
2 3
ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ. 1 2 ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ 8
4
6 ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ/ﺃﺳﻮﺩ 9 6 8
F 7 9
7 7 ﺃﺧﻀﺮ a
3 ﺃﺧﻀﺮ/ﺃﺳﻮﺩ b
5
2 ﺑﻨﻔﺴﺠﻲ c a c
1 R b d
8 ﺑﻨﻔﺴﺠﻲ/ﺃﺳﻮﺩ d
9 9 ﺃﺳﻮﺩ )ﺃﺭﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺳﻴﻪ( e
ﺻﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﻒ ﺧﺎ ٍﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻫﺎﻧﺎﺕ. e
ﺃﺻﻔﺮ
5cm
cm
f f
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ 1 g
ﺻﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻢ ١٢ﻓﻮﻟﺖ.
ﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ/ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ. h
ﺃﺣﻤﺮ g i
ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( 2
ﺻﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﻣﺤﻜﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻝ ) ١٢ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ DINﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ/ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺻﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ُ) RCAﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( 3
ﺃﺯﺭﻕ/ﺃﺑﻴﺾ h
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ 4
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴًﺒﺎ ﺻﺤﻴ ًﺤﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺻﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺮﺣﻞ
ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ 5
ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ. ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ٣٠٠ﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ١٢ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ 6
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭًﻳﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ. ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(.
ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ 7
ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ/ﺃﺑﻴﺾ i
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ 8
ﺻﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ.
ﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻀﺔ 9
ﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻀﺔ ) ٤ﺃﻭﻡ( j
Ar ٤٤
<QRD3230-A>61
)Black plate (98,1
ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ
٠٣
ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻻﺻﻖ. — ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ AUX ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ )ﺧﺮﺝ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ
ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻻﺻﻖ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ
ﻭﺧﺮﺝ RCAﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ( ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ. ﺃﺩ ِﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ .AUX ١
ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ) (Rear SP :F.Rangeﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﻔﻴﻀﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ
ﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ —
! ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ٥٠ﻭﺍﺕ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ( ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ٤ ) .(Rear SP :S/Wﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﻗﻀﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻌﺪ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ OFF/SRCﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ AUXﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ. ٢
ﺃﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ٨ﺃﻭﻡ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻗﺔ( .ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ١ﺃﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ٣ ،Rear SP :S/Wﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ
ﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ —
ﺃﻭﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺧﻔﻴﻀﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻱ.
ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﺎﻥ.
! ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻫﻮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺃﺭﺿﻲ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ AUXﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ .ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ.
ﻻ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﺧﻼﻝ —
ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ) AUXﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٤٢ ! ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻮ ًﻻ
ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ.
ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ ﺃﻭ ًﻻ .ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ) Rear SP :F.Rangeﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ. —
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ .ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ(.
ﻻ ُﺗﻘﺼﺮ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ. —
ﻟﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺳﻠﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ! ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻮ ًﻻ
ﻻ ﺗﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ —
ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﺭ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ) Rear SP :S/Wﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ
ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﻓﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ. %ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ DISP OFF/MIXﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ
ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻂ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ(.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﺼﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. — ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ.
ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ. ! ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ،ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺣﺘﻰ
ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ. —
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ
ﻻ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣ ًﻌﺎ ﻣﻄﻠ ًﻘﺎ. —
! ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ) Subwoofer1ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ
ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻀﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(٤٠
ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ/ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ُﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ! ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ،ﻓﺈﻥ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻀﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺮﺣﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ.
ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ )ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ٣٠٠ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ
! ﻛﻼ ﺧﺮﺟ ّﻲ ﺳﻠﻜ ّﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻭﺧﺮﺝ RCAﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ
١٢ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ( .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ١ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ.
ﺯﺟﺎﺟﻲ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ.
! ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘًﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ/ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ .SYSTEM ٢ ) Software Updateﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(
ﻀﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ .ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺃﻳ ً
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺄﺣﺪﺙ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ
ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ .ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ DEMO OFFﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ. ٣ .Bluetoothﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻭﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،Bluetoothﺭﺍﺟﻊ
ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻄﻞ.
ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻨﺎ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ.
ﻫﺎﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ .YES ٤ ! ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺃﺑ ًﺪﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .Bluetooth
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ.
! ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ. ٥ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .Bluetooth
6 ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) ACCﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ( ،ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
1 23 45 7 8 ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ.
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ
F O
N
STAR
T
ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ.
ba 9
ﺑﻼ ﻭﺿﻊ ACC ﻭﺿﻊ ACC
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ٢
! ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺠﻬﺪ ١٢ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻭﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ
ﻓﻘﻂ .ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ .SYSTEM ٣
c
ﻋﻄﻞ.
! ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺎﺱ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻄﻞ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ٤ﻟﻒ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ.
ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٤٢
1ﺩﺧﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ١٥ﺳﻢ — ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ.
٤٣ Ar
<QRD3230-A>62
)Black plate (97,1
ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ
) APP CONNECT MODEﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ (APP ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ،ONﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ) EngineTime alertﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ( ) Crossfade EFFECTﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﺷﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ(
ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ OFF
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎ ًﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﺎﺳًﺒﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ. ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﻴﻨﺔ. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﺷﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﻧﺬﺍﺭ. 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ.
) Wiredﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ) Bluetooth—(iPhoneﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ( 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. ) ONﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(—) OFFﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(
! ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ Pandoraﺃﻭ ) BT AUDIOﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ (Bluetooth 30Minutes—15Minutes—OFF
.App
ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ BT Audioﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ) Clockﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ( ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
.Bluetooth ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ Flanger EFFECTﻭCrush EFFECT
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ. ﻭ Crossfade EFFECTﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ iPodﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ BT Audioﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ.
) ONﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ()—Elapsed timeﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ
١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ OFF/SRCﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ) PANDORAﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ (Pandora ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ(—)OFFﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ
ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ. ! ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ DEH-X9650SD
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ Pandoraﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ .ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ Pandoraﻋﻠﻰ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .CLK
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ.
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ٢
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ Pandoraﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ) Auto PIﺑﺤﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ (PI
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ.
ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ .SETUP ٣ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ،
) Clear memoryﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Bluetoothﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ١
٤ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ( 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ PIﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ.
ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Bluetoothﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ. ) Warning toneﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ( ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ .SYSTEM ٢
! ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ Software Updateﻟـ DEH-X9650SD
ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﻭ.DEH-X7650SD ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ
ﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ .ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ٣ﻟﻒ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ.
ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ،ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ/ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ )/(PINﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ/ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
) FM stepﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ (FM ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ.
ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ! BT AUDIOﻭ Clear memoryﻭBT Version Info.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ. ﻭ APP CONNECT MODEﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟـ DEH-
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ .FM
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ .Clear memory YESﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ) AUXﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ( X9650SDﻭ.DEH-X7650SD
١٠٠) 100kHzﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(— ٥٠) 50kHzﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ.
) AM stepﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ (AM ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Bluetoothﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ) Language selectﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ AUXﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ.
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ،ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ Cancelﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ .AM ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ. ) BRIGHTNESSﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ.
٩) 9kHzﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(— ١٠) 10kHzﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ( 2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. —English—Español—Portuguêsﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ Clearedﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ .Bluetooth —
) S/W controlﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻀﺔ( 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
! ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﻻ ﺗﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ.
2ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. ) Calendarﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(
) BT Version Info.ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ (Bluetooth ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ 5 :ﺇﻟﻰ 1
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ .Bluetooth ) Contrastﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(
ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ—ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ—ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ.
2ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
2ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ. ) Clock Settingﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ(
0ﺇﻟﻰ 15ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺾ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ.
) Ever-scrollﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ(
ﺳﺎﻋﺔ—ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ—ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ
2ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ.
Ar ٤٢
<QRD3230-A>63
)Black plate (96,1
ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ MIXTRAX
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭ MIXTRAXﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ MIXTRAX ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ،Customﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ.
! ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ .MIX Fixed 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
! ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: 2ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ.
LOOP EFFECTﻭFlanger EFFECT ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ
! ﻣﻦ Sound Level Mode Color 1ﺇﻟﻰ Color 6
ﻭ Echo EFFECTﻭCrush EFFECT – ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ Key Side
ﻭ.Crossfade EFFECT ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. ﻭ.Display Side
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ١
! ﻣﻦ Low Pass Mode Color 1ﺇﻟﻰ – Color 6
ﻋﺮﺽ .MIX Settings ١ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ١
٢ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. .MIXTRAX
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ. ٢ ! – Flashing Color Randomﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ILLUMINATIONﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ. ٢
ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ٣ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ .MIXTRAX
٣ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ. ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ. ٣ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ Key Sideﺃﻭ .Display Sideﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ MIXTRAXﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ
ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ! – Sound Level Mode Randomﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ.
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ .MIXTRAX
ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
) MIX Fixedﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ (MIXTRAX ! – Low Pass Mode Randomﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ
) SHORT PLAYBACKﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ(
ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ. ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ .MIXTRAX
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. ) DISP EFFECTﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. ٥ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ.
) ONﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(—) OFFﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ MIXTRAXﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ. 2ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. ) Rﺃﺣﻤﺮ(—) Gﺃﺧﻀﺮ(—) Bﺃﺯﺭﻕ(
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. ١.٠ ) 1.0 MINﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(—١.٥ ) 1.5 MINﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(—2.0 MIN
) LOOP EFFECTﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ( 2ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. ) ٢.٠ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(—٢.٥ ) 2.5 MINﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(—٣.٠ ) 3.0 MINﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ( ٦ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ.
) MIXTRAX 1ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ MIXTRAXﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ —(١ —) Randomﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ(—) OFFﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ 0 :ﺇﻟﻰ 60
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋًﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ
) MIXTRAX 2ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ MIXTRAXﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ —(٢ ) FLASH AREAﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( #ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ 20ﻟﻠﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ) Rﺃﺣﻤﺮ( Gﻭ
ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
)OFFﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ( )ﺃﺧﻀﺮ( Bﻭ)ﺃﺯﺭﻕ( ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ. #ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳ ً
ﻀﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
) ONﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(—) OFFﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ) CUT IN EFFECTﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ( 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
) Flanger EFFECTﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻼﻧﺠﺮ( 2ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ MIXTRAXﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﺪﻭًﻳﺎ. ) Key & Displayﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ(—) KEY SIDEﻗﺴﻢ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ .Scan
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻼﻧﺠﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ(—) OFFﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ.
) ONﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(—) OFFﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ! ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ُ ،OFFﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﺿﻤﻦ
) ONﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(—) OFFﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(
ILLUMINATIONﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. ﺣﻮﻝ MIXTRAX
) Echo EFFECTﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺻﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ) MIX Settingsﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ (MIXTRAX ُﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ MIXTRAXﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ
) Flashing Colorﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ MIXTRAXﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٤١ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻭﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺻﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺰﺝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ.
) ONﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(—) OFFﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ SHORT PLAYBACKﻭCUT IN EFFECT ! ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ،ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ/ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ.
) Crush EFFECTﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﻖ(
ﻭ MIX Settingsﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ MIXTRAX Appﻗﻴﺪ ! ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ MIXTRAXﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ .Appﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﺎﺭ ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ .ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. MIXTRAX Appﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ. MIXTRAXﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٣٣
) ONﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(—) OFFﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(
٤١ Ar
<QRD3230-A>64
)Black plate (95,1
ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ
) Key Sideﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ
ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ. ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ Custom1ﺃﻭ .Custom2
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. ! ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ Custom1ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ .ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ،
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋًﻴﺎ.
2ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻀﺔ. ! (iPhone) Pandora ،SD ،iPod ،USBﻭApp
! ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )ﺑﺪ ًﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ Whiteﺇﻟﻰ (Blue
3ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ. )(iPhone
! ) Scanﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋًﻴﺎ(
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ. 125Hz—100Hz—80Hz—63Hz—50Hz ! ) Pandora ،BT Audioﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ( ،ﻭ) Appﻫﺎﺗﻒ
! ) Customﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ(
4ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺎﺭ. ﺫﻛﻲ(
) Display Sideﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ١ +6ﺇﻟﻰ –24ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺾ. ! ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ Custom2ﻫﻮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ُﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺷﺎﺋﻊ ﻟﻜﻞ
ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ. ) Bass Boosterﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ(
٢ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
.ENTERTAINMENT 2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ:
2ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ—ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ
! ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )ﺑﺪ ًﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ Whiteﺇﻟﻰ (Blue 2ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ.
٣ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. 3ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ.
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
! ) Scanﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋًﻴﺎ( 0ﺇﻟﻰ +6ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺾ.
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ—ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ—ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ—ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ —١ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ:
! ) Customﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ(
ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ —٢ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ —٣ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ —٤ﻣﺤﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﻒ— ) HPFﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ( 8kHz—3.15kHz—1.25kHz—315Hz—100Hz
) Key & Displayﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ—ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ—ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ +6 :ﺇﻟﻰ –6
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ .ﻳﺘﻢ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ. ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺮ ّﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ) (HPFﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ) Loudnessﻋﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ. ٤ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ.
ﻳﻌ ّﻮﺽ ﻋﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺺ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ
2ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
! ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )ﺑﺪ ًﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ Whiteﺇﻟﻰ (Blue 2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮ ّﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ.
! ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ. 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
! ) Scanﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋًﻴﺎ( 3ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ.
! ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺒ ًﻌﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ 2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ.
125Hz—100Hz—80Hz—63Hz—50Hz
) Phoneﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ( ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. 3ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ.
! ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ Radioﺃﻭ ،AUXﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ) SLAﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ( ) Lowﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ(—) Midﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(—) Highﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ(
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋًﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ. ) Subwoofer1ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻀﺔ(
2ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. ! ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ FMﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ.
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺠ ّﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﻔﻴﻀﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ
! – Flashingﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ .Key Side ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ AMﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ. ! ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳ ً
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ.
! Flash FX 1ﺇﻟﻰ – Flash FX 6ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ! ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋًﻴﺎ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ .ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ! (iPhone) Pandora ،SD ،iPod ،USBﻭApp
2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ
ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. )(iPhone
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ.
! – OFFﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ! ) Pandora ،BT Audioﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ( ،ﻭ) Appﻫﺎﺗﻒ
3ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺎﺭ.
ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ. ﺫﻛﻲ(
ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ،ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ Reverseﻓﻲ
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
) ILLUMI FXﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ( ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ١ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ،ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ
2ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ.
Normalﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺗﻀﻲء ﻭﺗﻨﻄﻔﺄ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ +4 :ﺇﻟﻰ –4
ﺑﺒﻂء ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻹﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ. ٢ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ) Subwoofer2ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻀﺔ(
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ILLUMI FXﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ. .ILLUMINATION
! ﺳﻴﻨﺸﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻜﻴﻒ
ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ILLUMI FXﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ٣ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ. ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
! ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ Phoneﻟـ DEH-X9650SDﻭDEH-
.X7650SD
Ar ٤٠
<QRD3230-A>65
)Black plate (94,1
ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ
٣٩ Ar
<QRD3230-A>66
)Black plate (93,1
ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
.http://www.pandora.com
ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ Pandoraﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ iPhone
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻂ/ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ
2ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ 3 4 5 6 www.pandora.com/everywhere/mobileﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ
) From Trackﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ(—) From Artistﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ(— ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ.
DEH-X7650SD/DEH-X9650SD
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻴﺔ.
) From Genreﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ(
3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ. )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻂ/ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ١ 12
ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ iPhone
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ From Trackﺃﻭ From Artistﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ
ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ. ٢ ﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ iPhoneﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ .USB ١
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ،From Genreﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ
ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺯ ٢ﺍﺧﺘﺮ Wiredﻓﻲ .APP CONNECT MODEﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ
4ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺌﺔ. )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(. 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ) APP CONNECT MODEﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ
5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ. 3 5 6 4 ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ (APPﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٤٢
! – ABCﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺑﺠﺪًﻳﺎ
6ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ. ! – DATEﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ DEH-X9650SDﻭ ،DEH-X7650SDﺗﺎﺑﻊ
7ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ. ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﺇﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ 1 ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ 2
ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
ﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ New stationﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ! ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳ ً ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ PAUSE/PLAY 3 ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ .Pandora ٣
ﻋﻠﻰ . 1ﺃﺩﺭ .M.C. ﻣﺆﺷﺮ S.Rtrv 4
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ iPhoneﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. ٤
) Pauseﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ( ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ )ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ( 5
1ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .M.C. ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ 6
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ. ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ
ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ DEH-X9650BTﻭDEH-X8650BT
) Sound Retrieverﻣﺴﺘﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( 1ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ .M.C.
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ .DELETE YES ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ iPhoneﻓﻲ
١ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .DISP/ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ. ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ٣٨ﺃﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٣٨
) OFF—2—1ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(
Bluetoothﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ .ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .M.C.
ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٣٦
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ 1ﻓﻌﺎ ًﻻ ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ 2ﻓﻌﺎ ًﻻ ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ.
1ﺃﺩﺭ LEVERﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ.
ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ
ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ. 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ /BAND
Ar ٣٨
<QRD3230-A>67
)Black plate (92,1
ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ
ﻳﺒّﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ Bluetoothﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ. — ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ) A2DPﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ(:
ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋًﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ. ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ 2 ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ.
ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ.
! ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ PAUSE/PLAY 3 ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ A2DPﻣﻊ ) Pandoraﻫﺎﺗﻒ
ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ.
Bluetoothﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ. ﻣﺆﺷﺮ S.Rtrv 4 ﺫﻛﻲ( ﻭ) Appﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ( ﻭ.BT Audio
ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ) Visibilityﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٣٦
! ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. — ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ) AVRCPﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ُﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ) ABC Searchﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ(.
Bluetoothﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ. ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ )ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ( 5 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ/ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( :ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗًﺘﺎ،
2ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ.
) Repeatﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ(
ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ 6 ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ.
3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ.
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ Bluetoothﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ،ﺍﺭﺟﻊ !
4ﻟﻒ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ. ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ.
! ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ 1ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ LEVERﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ. ﻧﻈ ًﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻱ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺸﻮﻳ ًﺸﺎ ،ﺗﺠﻨﺐ !
6ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ.
Bluetoothﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ 7ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ.
! ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ .Bluetooth
1ﺃﺩﺭ .LEVER ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ Bluetoothﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ !
Bluetoothﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ. ) Phone Functionﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ(
ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺑﺪﺅﻩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ.
) Sound Retrieverﻣﺴﺘﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ Auto answerﻭ Ring toneﻭPH.B.Name
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ . /BAND ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ Bluetoothﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ،ﻻ !
viewﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ Bluetoothﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋًﻴﺎ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٣٧
ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ !
) OFF—2—1ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ Bluetoothﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ.
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ 1ﻓﻌﺎ ًﻻ ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ 2ﻓﻌﺎ ًﻻ ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ Bluetoothﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ !
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ،ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ
ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ. ١ﻋﺮﺽ .Phone Function
.DISP/ %ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ) Phone Functionﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٣٧
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟـ Pandora
â
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ Bluetooth ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ. ٢
ﻣﻬﻢ: ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ،Bluetoothﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ١ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ .Bluetoothﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ
ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ Pandoraﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ/ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ٣ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ :Pioneer ﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ Bluetoothﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ. ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
٢ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺣﺎﻟًﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ Pandoraﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻠﻨﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ. !
.FUNCTION
ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ Pandoraﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ! 1ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ) Auto answerﺭﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ .Bluetoothﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
٣ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ Pandoraﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ! ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٣٦ 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ.
ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ iTunesﻭ.Google Play
) Ring toneﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ(
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻉ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ !
) Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(
ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ Pandoraﻣﻦ iPhoneeﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ .ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ.
ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ URLﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ:
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
http://www.pandora.com/register 1 2 ) PH.B.Name viewﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ(
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺧﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ iPhoneﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍ ًﻣﺎ ! ) Stopﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(
ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ.
ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ Pandoraﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ G3ﻭ/ﺃﻭ 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
.EDGE
ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ G3ﺃﻭ EDGEﺃﻭ !
) Pauseﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ( ﺻﻮﺕ Bluetooth
Wi-Fiﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ .Pandora 3 4 5 6 ﻫﺎﻡ
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ.
! ﺗﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ ،ﺣﺴﺐ
) Randomﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ( 1ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ Bluetoothﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ: ّ
٣٧ Ar
<QRD3230-A>68
)Black plate (91,1
ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
) Device INFOﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ (Bluetooth ) Device listﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ(
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺎ ًﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻱ؛ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ
! ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ. ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻼﻳﺪﻭﻱ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. 1
! ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺧﻔﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺧﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ،
2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. ﻟﻒ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ/ﻓﺼﻠﻪ. 2
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ .Not found
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ—ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Bluetooth
2ﻟﻒ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ.
! ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
Bluetoothﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ iPhoneﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ
) Guest Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻴﻒ( ! ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ؛ ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ .RE-SEARCH
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ. 3 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ .Bluetooth
! ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ .Connected
Bluetoothﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ.
ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ﻣ ًﻌﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ،ﻓﺴﺘﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ Delete device ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ،ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ! ١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ
3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ.
ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋًﻴﺎ ﻭﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ .ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ. ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
! ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ،ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ )Pioneer BT
) Delete deviceﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٣٦
.(Unitﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ PINﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ. ) Delete deviceﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ(
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ. ٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ
! ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ PINﻋﻠﻰ 0000
) Auto pairingﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻛﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ .ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. 1 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ . /BAND
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
! ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ 6ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻒ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ. 2
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ iPhoneﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ،USB
ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ .Bluetooth ! ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ُﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋًﻴﺎ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭ.iPhone ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ 6ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ Bluetoothﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ. ! ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ .Bluetooth ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ .Delete YES 3
! ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ iOSﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ .iPhone
! ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ٦ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ .ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ. 4
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ. ! ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ
ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ،ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ !
! ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ USBﺭﻗﻢ .٢ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ.
! ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
! ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻬﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ
ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ. ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﻻ ﺗﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ. !
ﻧﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ! ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ,ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ Device
) Add deviceﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ( ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
Fullﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ،
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ١ ! ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ
ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺃﻭ ًﻻ.
ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
٢ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ. ) Auto connectﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ Bluetoothﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋًﻴﺎ( ! ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﺳﺮﻳ ًﻌﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ. ! ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺒﻄﺊ ،ﻭﺑﺘﺮ ٍﻭ ،ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺡ.
) Missed callsﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺘﺔ( ) Visibilityﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ(
) Dialled callsﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ( ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ Bluetoothﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ
) Received callsﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ( ﻫﺎﻡ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ.
ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. 1 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ.
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Bluetoothﻣﺘﺼ ًﻼ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ،
ﻟﻒ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ. 2 ) Pin code inputﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ( ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺘﺼﻼﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. 3
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ! ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ PINﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ .Bluetooth
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ١
ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ .M.C. ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ,0000ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
#ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
) PhoneBookﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ( 2ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ.
٢ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
4ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ،PINﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ .M.C.
! ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ،PINﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ .PIN
Ar ٣٦
<QRD3230-A>69
)Black plate (90,1
ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ
! ُﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻣﺜﻞ ! – Ctrl Audioﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ iPodﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ
) Shuffle allﺧﻠﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(
ﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،ﻭﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. ! ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ .ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ) .(MusicSphereﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﺎ ًﺣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ
ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﺑﺢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ. ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،Shuffle allﺣﺪﺩ Shuffle OFFﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﺎ.
! ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ Ctrl iPodﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ
.Shuffle modeﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ! ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ
ﻣﺆﻗًﺘﺎ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ iPodﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻲ ﺣﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ) Shuffle modeﺧﻠﻂ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٣٥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ) (MusicSphereﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ.
! ﻣﺎﺯﺍﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ
) Link playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﺑﻂ( ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ .Ctrl iPod
— ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
1ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ .Bluetoothﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. — ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ/ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ
ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٣٦ 2ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ. — ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ )ﻓﺼﻞ( ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
2ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﺎﻥ ! ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. • ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﻔﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺣﺎﻟًﻴﺎ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ .Bluetoothﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟًﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٣٥ • ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻸﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ
ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٣٦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ • ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟًﻴﺎ
) Pauseﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ(
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ١ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﺑﻂ.
) Audiobooksﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ( ٢ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
.FUNCTION ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ. ٢
ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ
ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٣٦ 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. ! – Artistﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ
! – Fasterﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ٣ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ. ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺣﺎﻟًﻴﺎ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ! – Normalﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ! –Albumﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺣﺎﻟًﻴﺎ.
. 1ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ! – Slowerﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ! ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ،Play modeﻭ،Shuffle mode ! – Genreﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ
ﻭ ،Shuffle allﻭ ،Link playﻭ Audiobooksﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﻟًﻴﺎ.
ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ) Sound Retrieverﻣﺴﺘﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ Ctrl iPodﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ، ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ/ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
. 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ iPodﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ iPodﻓﻲ
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ
ﺭﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٣٥
) OFF—2—1ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(
. 1ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ! ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ/ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ 1ﻓﻌﺎ ًﻻ ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ 2ﻓﻌﺎ ًﻻ ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻻﺕ
) Play modeﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ( ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﺑﻂ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ
ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(.
. 1ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ. ! ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤّﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ! – Repeat Oneﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟًﻴﺎ ﻭﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ/ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .M.C. ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ Bluetooth ! –Repeat Allﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ
ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ! ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ،Ctrl iPodﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ iPodﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﺎﺛ ًﻼ ﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ iPodﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ. ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ iPod
. 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ DEH-X9650BTﻭDEH-X8650BT
) Shuffle modeﺧﻠﻂ( ﺻﻞ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ iPodﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ iPodﺍﻟﻤﻮ ّ
ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ Bluetooth Ctrl iPodﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﺯ iPodﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
1ﺃﺩﺭ LEVERﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. ! ﺍﻟﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ iPod nano
! ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ،ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ. ﻫﺎﻡ ! – Shuffle Songsﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ! iPodﺑﻘﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ! ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ /BANDﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﻋﺒﺮ Bluetoothﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ! – Shuffle Albumsﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. %ﺍﺿﻐﻂ /BAND
ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋًﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ. ! – Ctrl iPodﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ iPodﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
! ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺒ ًﻌﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻱ. ! – Shuffle OFFﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ. ﺻﻞ. iPodﺍﻟﻤﻮ ّ
٣٥ Ar
<QRD3230-A>70
)Black plate (89,1
ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ. 5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺼ ّﻔﺢ ﺑﺤ ًﺜﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ! ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ
)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
! ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ iPodﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ACCﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ .ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. iPod
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ .Ctrl Audio ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ /USBﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﺑﻘﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ
! ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻣﻦ iPodﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ. /USBﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ACCﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺌﺔ/ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ. ٢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ
! ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ iPodﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻣﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺰﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ. DEH-X8650BT/DEH-X9650BT ! ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ
1 2 3 4 /USBﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
1ﺃﺩﺭ .M.C.
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ MIXTRAX ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ /USBﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SDﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ
) Playlistsﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(—) Artistsﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻧﻮﻥ(—
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﺴﺄﻝ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻡ
) Albumsﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ(—) Songsﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺎﺕ(—Podcasts
ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ MIXTRAXﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻻ.
)ﺑﺚ ) Genres—(Podcastﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ(—
) Composersﻣﻠﺤﻨﻮﻥ(—) Audiobooksﻛﺘﺐ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ( 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ DISP OFF/MIXﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ MIXTRAXﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ) Play modeﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ(
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ! ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ،MIXTRAXﺭﺍﺟﻊ 5 6 7 8 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ.
1ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .M.C. ﺣﻮﻝ MIXTRAXﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٤١ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ CD-RW/CD-R/CD
DEH-X7650SD/DEH-X9650SD
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻏﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ! – Disc repeatﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
1 2 3 4 ! – Track repeatﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ
1ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺌﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .M.C. ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
! – Folder repeatﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )(SD، USB
1ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺌﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ .M.C.
! – All repeatﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ
.DISP/ %ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ! – Track repeatﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ
ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺑﺠﺪًﻳﺎ
ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ 1ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ! – Folder repeatﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ
ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ Pandoraﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ 5 7 8 6
ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻱ.
) Random modeﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ(
2ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﻑ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ Pandoraﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ LINK PLAY 1
3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ. ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ 2 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ.
! ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .DISP/ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ 3
.DISP/ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ١ ) Link playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﺑﻂ(
ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ 4
ﻣﺆﺷﺮ PAUSE/PLAY 5
Ar ٣٤
<QRD3230-A>71
)Black plate (88,1
ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ
ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ONﻓﻲ .Music browse ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ONﻓﻲ .Music browse .DISP/ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ١
ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ) Music browseﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ) Music browseﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﻣﻊ
ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٣٤ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٣٤ ٢ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ.
ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ-ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ.
) Trackﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ(—) Artistﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ(
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ . /BAND
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
! ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ٣٢ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ.
• ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﻔﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺣﺎﻟًﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ.
• ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻸﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ Pandoraﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ MTP
• ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟًﻴﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺌﺔ/ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ. ٢ .Pandora ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ Androidﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ )MTPﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ
ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ٤٫٠ Android OSﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ( ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ
ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ. ٤ MTPﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ .USBﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ،Androidﻗﻢ
ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﺑﻂ. 1ﺃﺩﺭ .M.C. ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ.
) Artistsﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻧﻮﻥ(—) Albumsﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ(—Songs ٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ. ! ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ .MIXTRAX
ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ. ٢ )ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺎﺕ(—) Genresﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ( ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. ! ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ .WAV
! – Artistﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ! ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ.
ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺣﺎﻟًﻴﺎ.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
1ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .M.C. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
! –Albumﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺣﺎﻟًﻴﺎ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ
! – Genreﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻏﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ! ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ.
ﺣﺎﻟًﻴﺎ. 1ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺌﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .M.C. ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ/ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ! ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﻣﻮﺻﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ،
ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ/ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ 1ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺌﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ .M.C. ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ OFFﻓﻲ .Music browse ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ.
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ) Music browseﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ! ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
! ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ/ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺑﺠﺪًﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٣٤ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ.
ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﺑﻂ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ 1ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(. ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻱ.
! ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ
)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ/ ١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ MIXTRAX
2ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﻑ. ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ.
ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟًﻴﺎ ﻭﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ/ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. 3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ MIXTRAXﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ
! ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .DISP/ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. ٢
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ USBﺃﻭ SDﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ.
ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ .USB MTP
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ١ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ DISP OFF/MIXﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ MIXTRAXﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ
! ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ 1ﺃﺩﺭ .M.C. ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ.
٢ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ,Songs ,Albums ,Artistsﻭ .Genresﻭﺳﻮﻑ ! ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ،MIXTRAXﺭﺍﺟﻊ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
.FUNCTION ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ٧٠ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳًﺒﺎ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ١٠٠٠ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ, ﺣﻮﻝ MIXTRAXﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٤١
1ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .M.C.
ﻭﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ٣٠٠٠ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ .ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ
٣ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ. ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗًﺘﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ
ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ. 1ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .M.C. ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
! ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Music browseﻭ Link playﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ! ﺗﺒ ًﻌﺎ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ،USBﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ
ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ .CD ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴ ًﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
1ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ .M.C.
! ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ Link playﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ OFFﻓﻲ ! ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ. .DISP/ %ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
.Music browseﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ! ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ.
) Music browseﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٣٤ ﺍﻟﺘﺼ ّﻔﺢ ﺑﺤ ًﺜﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ Pandoraﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ USBﺃﻭ SDﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ SDﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ Pandoraﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ USBﺃﻭ SDﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ. ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
٣٣ Ar
<QRD3230-A>72
)Black plate (87,1
ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻗﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺃﻥ 1ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
! ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ Pioneer USBﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USB ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(. 2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ. ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﺿﻌﻒ.
DEH-X8650BT/DEH-X9650BT ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ.
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USB ) PTY searchﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ( 3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ LEVERﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ.
1 2 3
1ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ .USB ﺃﺩﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ) PTYﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ SD 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
1ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ SDﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SD 2ﺃﺩﺭ LEVERﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ. 4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ LEVERﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ.
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ Others—Classics—Popular—News&Inf ﺃﺩﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ.
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ. 3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ.
2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ OFF/SRCﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ SDﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ. 4 5 6 7 ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺗﺒﺚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻫﺬﺍ .ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ! ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋًﻴﺎ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ،
ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ،ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ. ﻣﺴﺘﺒﺪ ًﻻ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻧﺺ ﺑﺄﺣﺪﺙ ﻧﺺ.
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ SD DEH-X7650SD/DEH-X9650SD ! ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ SDﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ. 1 2 3 ! ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ
ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ.
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ PTYﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ.
2ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ.
! ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺗﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ ,ﻳﺘﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ١
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ Not foundﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ. ٢ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ UPﺃﻭ .DOWN
.FUNCTION
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ 4 6 7 5 ) Traffic Announceﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭﻱ(
1ﺃﺩﺭ .LEVER ٣ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
1ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻌ ّﺪﻝ ﺍﻟِﺒﺖ/ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ.
ﻳﺒّﻴﻦ ﻣﻌ ّﺪﻝ ِﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ! ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ،/AMﻳﺘﺎﺡ BSMﻭLocal
1ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ LEVERﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ.
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ. ) Alternative FREQﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺪﻳﻠﺔ( ﻭ Tuning Modeﻓﻘﻂ.
! ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ،ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ
! ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ AACﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ) VBRﻣﻌ ّﺪﻝ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺟﻴﺪ ،ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ّﺑﺖ ﻣﺘﻐّﻴﺮ( ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌ ّﺪﻝ ﺍﻟّﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ .ﻭﻣﻊ ) BSMﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ(
ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻔﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋًﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ) BSMﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ( ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻗﻮﻯ ﺳﺖ
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ . /BAND ،AACﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ .VBR
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ. ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋًﻴﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ.
2ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻭCD-DA 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ .BSM
ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ. ) News interruptﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ(
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ . /BAND ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ M.C.ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
3ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ
Ar ٣٢
<QRD3230-A>73
)Black plate (86,1
ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺤﺚ PIﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ News 2 ! ﻻ ﺗﺪﻉ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ
ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ Traffic Announce 3 ﺗﺤﺘﺒﺲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺩﻭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ) 5ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ( 4
ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ 5
ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﺤﺚ PIﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ.
ﻣﺆﺷﺮ LOC 6 ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ
! ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﺒﺤﺚ PIﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ .ﺭﺍﺟﻊ 1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ.
) Auto PIﺑﺤﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ (PIﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٤٢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ،ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺝ.
ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ 7 ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ
ﻣﺆﺷﺮ TEXT 8 ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ/ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ/ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ ًﻯ ﻭﺍﺣ ًﺪﺍ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ( ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ
ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ. 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .DISP/ 1ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ.
)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(. ١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ PTY 9 2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ ) (+ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ )–(
ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ. ﺍﺳﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ a ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ . /BAND
ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ b
٢ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ M.C.ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ/ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ
ﺃﺩﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ . /BAND
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ /BANDﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ )FM-1 ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
٣ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ. ﻭ FM-2ﻭ FM-3ﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ FMﺃﻭ .(AM 1ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﺃﻭ .LEVER
ﺃﺩﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ. ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ )ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺓ( ! ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ،ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ”ﺃﺩﺭ “M.C.ﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ
#ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ FMﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ 1ﺃﺩﺭ .LEVER ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
FMﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ. ! ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ) Manualﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ( ﺿﻤﻦ Tuning Mode ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ
ﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ UPﺃﻭ .DOWN #ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳ ً
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ. ! ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ.
ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ RDS ! ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ
1ﺃﺩﺭ .LEVER
ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺫﺍﻋﻴﺔ RDSﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ( ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ
! ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ) Presetﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ( ﺿﻤﻦ Tuning
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺫﺍﻋﻴﺔ. ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ.
Modeﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ. 1 23 4 5 6 7
%ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .DISP/ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ
/PTYﺍﺳﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ —ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ/ﺍﺳﻢ ﻓﻨﺎﻥ 1ﺃﺩﺭ LEVERﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ. ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ
ّ ّ
! ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ LEVERﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ .ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ !
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ .LEVER ﺷﻬﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ.
! ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ !
ً
ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ 89 a ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ. !
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ،Tuning Modeﺭﺍﺟﻊ RDS
! ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ. ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ. !
) Tuning Modeﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٣٢
1 23 4 5 6 7 ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴ ّﺮﺏ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ !
ﺗﻤﺎ ًﻣﺎ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺤﺚ PI ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ !
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ/ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ.
ﺳﻴﺌﺔ ،ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋًﻴﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ.
ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ PI SEEKﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. ﻫﺎﻡ
b ! ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ
ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ.
ﺧﻼﻑ RDSﺃﻭ AM
! ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮﺀ
1ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ.
٣١ Ar
<QRD3230-A>74
)Black plate (85,1
ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
App—Pandora—iPod/USB—CD—Radio 1ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ. ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ١٢) 12Hﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ(— ٢٤) 24Hﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ
)ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ(—BT Audio—AUX—SD ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎ ! ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ(
DEH-X7650SD ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ. 6
App—Pandora—iPod/USB—CD—Radio
)ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ(—AUX—SD ) FM stepﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ (FM
DEH-X9650SD/DEH-X9650BT
! ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺣﺎﻟًﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ Pandoraﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻠﻨﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ FM stepﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ FM
ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ PANDORAﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ(.
ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ
ﻓﻴﻬﺎ .ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ) PANDORAﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ 1ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ .FM
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ.
(Pandoraﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .٤٢ 2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ
2ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﺑﻠﻄﻒ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ. ١٠٠) 100kHzﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(— ٥٠) 50kHzﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(
ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ.
ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ 2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻒ
ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ! ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ٥٠ﻙ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ.
! ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ iPodﻣﺘﺼ ًﻼ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ُ Appﻣﺤﺪﺩ، ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ Appﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .APP ) AM stepﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ (AM
3ﻗﻢ ﺩﻭ ًﻣﺎ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ.
! ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ/ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ AM stepﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ AM
ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ
)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ(.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ .ﻟﻀ ّﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ،ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ. 1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻛﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﺩًﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ
ّ 1ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ .AM
! ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﻣﻮﺻﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺷﺒﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ٩) 9kHzﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(— ١٠) 10kHzﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(
ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USB
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ OFF/SRCﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. 2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ.
ﺃﻭ ًﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ.
! ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛ ًﻼ ﻣﻦ iPod1/USB1ﻭ iPod2/USB2ﻓﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ) Contrastﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(
ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ (CD-U50E) Pioneer USB 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ OFF/SRCﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ Pioneer USBﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ. ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ. 1ﺃﺩﺭ M.C.ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ.
0ﺇﻟﻰ 15ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺾ.
2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ M.C.ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ.
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ .Quit
Ar ٣٠
<QRD3230-A>75
)Black plate (84,1
ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ
OFF/SRC 1
LEVER 2
DISP/ 3
٢٩ Ar
<QRD3230-A>76
)Black plate (83,1
ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ٣٤ iPod
! ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ .ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ٣٥ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ Bluetoothﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﺭﻛﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ٣٧ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟـ Pandoraâ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. ٣٩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ
٣٩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
٤٠ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ
ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ٤٠ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ
٤١ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ
! ﻻ ﺗﺪﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ .ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ
٤١ ﺣﻮﻝ MIXTRAX
ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ٤٢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ
ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ. ٤٢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻀﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻑ! ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔ ً ٤٣ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ
ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ. ٤٣ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ AUX
! ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ. ٤٣ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ
٤٣ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ
ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ
٤٣ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻨَﺘﺞ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ١ﻳﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ
٤٤ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ
ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ.IEC 60825-1:2007 ، ٤٥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ
٤٦ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ
٤٦ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ
٤٨ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ
ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ )ﻗﺮﺹ(SD، USB ،
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ٤٨
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﻓﻴﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ٤٩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ iPod
٤٩ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺮ ّﺧﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ PIONEER.
٤٩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ Bluetooth
٥٠ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ
٥٠ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ
Ar ٢٨
<QRD3230-A>77
)Black plate (82,1
ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ
۲۷ Fa
<QRD3230-A>78
)Black plate (81,1
ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ
SDHC Logoﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﯼ SD-3C, LLC.ﺍﺳﺖ. ) (Phone Book Access Profile) PBAPﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ! ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ
ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ(
iPodﻭ iPhone ) A2DPﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﺯﯾﻊ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ( !
،iPhone, iPod ،iPod classic ،iPod nanoﻭ iPod ) AVRCPﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ/ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮﯼ( ۱٫۳ !
touchﻣﺎﺭﮎ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﯼ Apple Inc.ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺮﯾﮑﺎ ﻭ ) SPPﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺳﺮﯼ( ۱٫۱ !
ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺭﺳﯿﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ.
Lightningﯾﮑﻌﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ Apple Inc.ﺍﺳﺖ.
”ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ “iPodﻭ ”ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ “iPhoneﺑﺪﯾﻦ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﯼ :ﭘﻮﺷﻪ
ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﯿﮑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ Bluetooth :ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ
ﺑﻪ iPodﯾﺎ iPhoneﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ Bluetoothﻭ ،logosﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﯼ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ
â ۰۱ﺗﺎ :۰۵ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ
ﺗﺒﻌﯿﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯾﯽ Appleﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ Bluetooth SIGﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ 1ﺗﺎ :6ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ
ﺍﺳﺖ Apple .ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﯾﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﯼ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ PIONEER CORPORATIONﺑﺎ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ
ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﯾﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﯿﺘﯽ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ .ﻟﻄﻔًﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﯼ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ
ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﺎ iPodﯾﺎ iPhone ﻣﺎﻟﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ،ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ
ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺗﺄﺛﯿﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ.
ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
iTunes
Androidäﻭ Google Play Appleﻭ iTunesﻣﺎﺭﮎ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﯼ ،Apple Inc.ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ
Androidﻭ Google Playﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺮﯾﮑﺎ ﻭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.
Google Incﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. )(USB ،SD
ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ
MP3
ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ
) (USB ،SDﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯼ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ ®Pandora ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ،ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ
،PANDORAﻟﻮﮔﻮﯼ ،PANDORAﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﯼ ﻏﯿﺮﺗﺠﺎﺭﯼ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺣﻘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
Pandoraﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﯼ ﯾﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﯼ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﺨﺶ )ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ، 1ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ
ﺷﺮﮐﺖ Pandora Media, Incﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺴﺐ ﻣﺎﻫﻮﺍﺭﻩ ،ﮐﺎﺑﻠﯽ ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ( ﺗﺠﺎﺭﯼ )ﺑﺎ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ،ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ 001xxx.mp3ﻭ
ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺩﺭﺁﻣﺪ( ،ﭘﺨﺶ/ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ،ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﺍﻧﺖ ﻭ/ﯾﺎ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ .(099yyy.mp3
ﯾﺎ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻮﺯﯾﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﯼ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﯿﮑﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ 2ﺁﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
MIXTRAX ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ 3ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺣﺎﻭﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ،
MIXTRAXﯾﮏ ﻣﺎﺭﮎ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﯼ PIONEER ﭼﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯼ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻬﯿﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ).(USB ،SD
CORPORATIONﺍﺳﺖ. ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ،ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ،ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ
http://www.mp3licensing.comﺩﯾﺪﻥ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ،USBﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ
WMA ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
Windows Mediaﯾﮏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﯼ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ
ﺗﺠﺎﺭﯼ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ Microsoftﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺪﻩ ﻭ/ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ
ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎﺳﺖ. ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ Bluetooth
ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﻓﻦ ﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ Microsoft ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻦ ﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ،Bluetoothﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ
Corporationﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﮐﺴﺐ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﺯMicrosoft . ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ
Licensing, Incﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﯾﺎ ﺗﻮﺯﯾﻊ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ. ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ.
! ) (Generic Access Profile) GAPﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ
ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ SD ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ(
SD Logoﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﯼ SD-3C, LLC.ﺍﺳﺖ. ! ) (Object Push Profile) OPPﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ(
miniSD Logoﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﯼ SD-3C, LLC.ﺍﺳﺖ. ! ) HFPﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮﯼ( ۱٫۵
microSD Logoﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﯼ SD-3C, LLC.ﺍﺳﺖ.
Fa ۲۶
<QRD3230-A>79
)Black plate (80,1
ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ
) iPod nanoﻧﺴﻞ (۱ ! ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﭘﺎﺭﺗﯿﺸﻦ ﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ) :(USB ،SDﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﮑﻤﻴﻠﯽ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ۳۲ :ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ۴۴/۱ ،ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ۴۸ ،ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ
iPhone 5 ! ﭘﺎﺭﺗﯿﺸﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻭﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
iPhone 4S ! ﻓﻘﻂ ۳۲ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ )ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ( ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ Lossless، Windows Mediaä Audio Professional
iPhone 4 ! ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎﺹ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ. ،ﺻﻮﺗﯽ/ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﺮﯾﺎﻧﯽ /DRMﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﺮﯾﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻭﯾﺪﯾﻮ :ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ
iPhone 3GS ! ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USBﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﯾﺎﺩﯼ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ،ﮐﻤﯽ
ﺗﺄﺧﯿﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ WMAﻣﻤﮑﻦ
iPhone 3G !
ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺪﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ. MP3
iPhone !
ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮﯼ ﯾﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ
ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﻞ ﯾﺎ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ،iPodﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ SD ﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USBﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﺪﯾﻦ
ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ.mp3 :
ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ. ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﮐﯽ ﺗﺄﺧﯿﺮ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﯿﺖ ۸ :ﮐﯿﻠﻮﺑﯿﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﺗﺎ ۳۲۰ﮐﯿﻠﻮﺑﯿﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ
ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﯼ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ) (MMCﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ.
ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ iPodﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ. )VBR، (CBR
ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﯼ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ SDﺗﻀﻤﯿﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ iPodﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ) (Lightningﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ۸ :ﮐﯿﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺗﺎ ۴۸ﮐﯿﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )۴۸ ،۴۴/۱ ،۳۲
ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ Lightningﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ) USBﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ iPodﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ SD-Audioﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ. ﮐﯿﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﺄﮐﯿﺪ(
ﺍﺳﺖ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ. ﺳﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺗﺐ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ :ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻫﺸﺖ ﺭﺩﻩ )ﺳﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺗﺐ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ID3ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ) 2.4 ،2.3 ،2.2 ،1.1 ،1.0 :ﻧﺴﺨﻪ
ﻋﻤ ًﻼ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(. 2.xﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ID3ﺑﺮ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ 1.xﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(.
ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ iPodﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Dockﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺍﺯ CD-IU51ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ
ﮐﻨﻨﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ.
ﺍﺣﺘﯿﺎﻁ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ :ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ۹۹ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ :M3uﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ
! Pioneerﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻫﺎﯼ iPodﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ /USBﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ /USBﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ :ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ۹۹۹ MP3) MP3iﺗﻌﺎﻣﻠﯽ( :mp3 PRO ،ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ
ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. /SDﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ SDHCﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﯿﺘﯽ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ،ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ISO 9660 :ﺳﻄﺢ ۱ﻭ Romeo ،Joliet ،۲
ﮐﺘﺎﺑﭽﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ،ﭘﺎﺩﮐﺴﺖ :ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ
ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
! Pioneerﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﯼ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﭼﻨﺪﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﺍﯼ :ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ WAV
USBﺭﺍ ﺗﻀﻤﯿﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﯼ :ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ
ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ،ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ.wav :
ﺍﺣﺘﯿﺎﻁ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﯿﺘﯽ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ. ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ
ﺑﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ۸ :ﻭ (LPCM)، ۴ (MS ADPCM) ۱۶
Pioneerﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ iPodﻫﯿﭻ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻪ ،ﺩﯾﺴﮏ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ
ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﯿﺘﯽ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ،ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ۱۶ :ﮐﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺗﺎ ۴۸ﮐﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ (LPCM)، ۰۵/۲۲
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺥ ﺩﻫﺪ. ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﯼ ﺑﺎ iPod ﮐﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻭ ۴۴/۱ﮐﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )(MS ADPCM
ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎﯼ iPodﺯﯾﺮ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ
ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ! ﻧﻤﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ USB MTPﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ )(USB ،SD
! ) iPod touchﻧﺴﻞ (۵
ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ! ) iPod touchﻧﺴﻞ (۴ AAC
ﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺳﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺗﺐ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ :ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻫﺸﺖ ﺭﺩﻩ )ﺳﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺗﺐ
! ) iPod touchﻧﺴﻞ (۳
ﻋﻤ ًﻼ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(.
! ) iPod touchﻧﺴﻞ (۲ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ AAC :ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ iTunes
! ) iPod touchﻧﺴﻞ (۱ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ :ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ۱۵۰۰
ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ.m4a :
! iPod classic
ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ :ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ۱۵۰۰۰
! iPodﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﯾﺪﯾﻮﯾﯽ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ۱۱/۰۲۵ :ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺗﺎ ۴۸ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ
! ) iPod nanoﻧﺴﻞ (۷ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ :ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ
ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ۱۶ :ﮐﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﺎ ۳۲۰ﮐﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ،
! ) iPod nanoﻧﺴﻞ (۶
VBR
! ) iPod nanoﻧﺴﻞ (۵
! ) iPod nanoﻧﺴﻞ (۴ :Apple Losslessﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ
! ) iPod nanoﻧﺴﻞ (۳
ﻓﺎﯾﻞ AACﺧﺮﯾﺪﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ iTunes
! ) iPod nanoﻧﺴﻞ (۲
)ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ :(.m4pﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ
۲۵ Fa
<QRD3230-A>80
)Black plate (79,1
ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ
ﺳﻌﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ SDﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ SD ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USB ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﯾﺴﮏ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ
BT error. Press BAND key to retry.
ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ،ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﯾﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Bluetoothﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺪ.
ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻫﺎﺏ USBﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﯿﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ،SDﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ،ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﯾﺴﮏ ﯾﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ
ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ،ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ .ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺑﺠﺰ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺷﯿﻤﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﯾﺴﮏ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
USBﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. Check your App. Press BAND key to retry.
ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﯾﺪ ﻓﻮﺭًﺍ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ
ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﯽ ﺩﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ، ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺪ.
ﺍﺯ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺑﯿﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﭙﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ،ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USBﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﺑﯿﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﭙﺮﺩ ،ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USBﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺯﻣﯿﻦ ﻭ ﮔﯿﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﯾﺮ ﭘﺪﺍﻝ
ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﯾﺎ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪ ﻣﯿﻌﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﯾﺞ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ
ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺩﯾﺴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒﯽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ Start up and play your Application.
iPod ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ،USBﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺩﻣﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺗﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﯿﻖ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﺩﯾﺴﮏ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
! ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺧﺸﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ iPodﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ iPodﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺯﻣﯿﻦ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ.
ﻭ ﮔﯿﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﯾﺮ ﭘﺪﺍﻝ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﯾﺎ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﯾﺴﮏ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﯿﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﯾﺴﮏ ،ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﯾﺴﮏ ،ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ
ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﭘﺨﺶ ،ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﻭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ
ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ iPod ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ SD ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﯾﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ. ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ
! ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ،iPodﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﮐﻮﻻﯾﺰﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ
ﺑﺎ iPodﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺭﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﯾﺴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ
ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﯼ SDﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ.
ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺑﺨﺸﺪ .ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ،iPodﺍﮐﻮﻻﯾﺰﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﺪ.
! SD
ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ. ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.
! miniSD ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﯾﺴﮏ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺁﻥ
! ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ) Repeatﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ( ! microSD ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ،ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﯾﺴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ
ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ iPodﺭﻭﯼ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ iPodﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ! SDHC ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﯾﺴﮏ ﻫﺎ ،ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺑﯿﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ،ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ) Allﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ( ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﯿﻦ ﺩﯾﺴﮏ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﺒﺐ
ﻣﯿﺎﺑﺪ. ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ SDﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ
ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺑﻠﻌﯿﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ،SDﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﻪ ﭘﺰﺷﮏ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ iPodﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﯾﺎ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ
ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺍﺯ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﻫﺎﯼ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ SDﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﯾﺎ
ﺩﯾﺴﮏ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﻠﺰﯼ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
! ﺩﯾﺴﮏ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﯿﭻ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺟﺴﻤﯽ ﺑﺠﺰ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ SDﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ! ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﯾﺴﮏﻫﺎﯼ ۱۲ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺍﺣﺘﯿﺎﻁ SDﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﺴﻤﯽ ﻓﻠﺰﯼ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﮑﻪ( ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﯾﺴﮏ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﯾﺴﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺩﯾﺴﮏﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﻭ ﮐﺎﻣ ًﻼ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺍﯼ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﯾﺴﮏ /ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ )(USB ،SD ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺷﮑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﯾﺴﮏﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ:
ﯾﺎ iPodﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ! ) DualDiscﺩﯾﺴﮏ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﻭﺗﺎﯾﯽ(
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ miniSDﯾﺎ ،microSDﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
)(USB ،SD ! ﺩﯾﺴﮏﻫﺎﯼ ۸ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮﯼ :ﺗﻼﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﯾﺴﮏﻫﺎ
ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺠﺰ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﻠﺰﯼ ﻧﯿﺰ ﻫﺴﺖ
ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﯼ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ) (USB ،SDﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ! ﺩﯾﺴﮏﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ
)ﺩﯾﺴﮏ(USB ،SD ،
ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ SDﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺩﯾﺪﻩ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﭘﯿﭽﯿﺪﮔﯽ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
WMA ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ( ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ
ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ) ،(USB ،SDﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ
ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ.
ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺥ ﺩﻫﺪ. ! ﺩﯾﺴﮏﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺳﯽ ﺩﯼﻫﺎ
ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ.wma :
! ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ. ! ﺩﯾﺴﮏﻫﺎﯼ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺩﯾﺪﻩ ،ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﯾﺴﮏﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺮﮎ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﮔﯽ،
ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﯿﺖ ۴۸ :ﮐﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﺎ ۳۲۰ﮐﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ )(CBR ! ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﯾﯽ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ. ﺷﮑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﯾﺎ ﭘﯿﭻ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﮔﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ
، ۴۸ﮐﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﺎ ۳۸۴ﮐﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ )(VBR ! ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ. ! ﺩﯾﺴﮏﻫﺎﯼ CD-R/RWﮐﻪ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ
Fa ۲۴
<QRD3230-A>81
)Black plate (78,1
ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ
Check Pandora. Press BAND key to retry. Try again later ERROR-16 CHECK USB
ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ Pandoraﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺑﻮﺩ. ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻣﯿﺎﻥ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ iPodﻗﺪﯾﻤﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USBﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﺑﻴﺶ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ
ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺑﻌﺪًﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻧﺴﺨﻪ iPodﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻧﻘﺺ .iPod ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USBﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ.
Start up Pandora. Press BAND key to retry. Skip limit reached ﺳﯿﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ iPodﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ،iPodﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻮﻳﻴﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ACCﻳﺎ
ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ Pandoraﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺑﻮﺩ. ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ ﭘﺮﺵ ) (Skipﺭﺳﯿﺪﯾﺪ. ﻣﺠﺪﺩًﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺪﺩًﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ONﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ .ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USBﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ
ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ! ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ ﭘﺮﺵ ) (Skipﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ. ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
! ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﯿﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﯾﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ Pandora ،ﮐﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺩ STOP
Disconnected.Press BAND key to retry. ﺷﺪﻥﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ. CHECK USB
ﻫﯿﭻ ﺁﻫﻨﮕﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ.
ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ. ﻟﯿﺴﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. iPodﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺭﮊ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. Check Application ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ iPodﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ
ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ Pandoraﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. Not found ﻧﻴﺴﺖ )ﻣﺜ ًﻼ ،ﺍﺷﻴﺎﯼ ﻓﻠﺰﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺮﻭ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ( .ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ،
ﯾﮏ iPhoneﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﻮﻳﻴﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ OFFﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ONﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ
Stations Full Can’t be Created ﻫﯿﭻ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ.
Pandoraﺭﻭﯼ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. iPodﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﯼ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ. ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ iPodﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﯾﮏ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺪﯾﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﮎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ.
ERROR-19
ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ.
ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Can’t Be Deleted ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ Bluetooth
Check Device ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﺸﺪ. – ﺳﻮﻳﻴﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ OFFﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ONﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ERROR-10
ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﭘﯿﻐﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ Pandoraﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
– ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ Pandoraﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩ. ﻧﻘﺺ ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻝ Bluetoothﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
– ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
No Network ﻟﻄﻔًﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺳﻮﻳﻴﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ OFFﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ACCﻳﺎ ONﻗﺮﺍﺭ
ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ USBﻳﺎ SDﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻧﻘﺺ .iPod
No Available Station ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻟﻄﻔًﺎ ﺑﺎ
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺳﯿﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ iPodﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ،iPodﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ
ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ Pioneerﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ.
ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﺸﺪ. ﻣﺠﺪﺩًﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺪﺩًﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
No Service ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ Pandoraﺭﻭﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﯾﮏ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ
ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ. ERROR-23
Pandora
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USBﺑﺎ FAT16، FAT12ﻳﺎ FAT 32ﻓﺮﻣﺖ
No Active Stations
ERROR-19 ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
Can’t Play ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺸﺪ. ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USBﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ FAT16، FAT12ﻳﺎ FAT
ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﯾﮏ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 32ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻋﻤﻠﯿﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺑﻮﺩ. ﺳﯿﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ iPodﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ،iPodﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ
ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻣﺠﺪﺩًﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺪﺩًﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
No BT device. Go to BT MENU to register. ERROR-60
ﻫﯿﭻ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ Bluetoothﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﺸﺪ. Start up the Pandora Application ﭘﺎﯾﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ Pandoraﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﯼ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ Pandoraﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ iPhoneﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ً
–ﺳﻮﯾﯿﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﯼ OFFﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺭﻭﯼ ON
No BT device. Go to BT MENU to register. BT error. Press BAND key to retry. ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﻫﯿﭻ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ Bluetoothﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﺸﺪ. ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Bluetoothﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺪ. Can’t operate –ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﯼ OFFﻭ ﻣﺠﺪﺩًﺍ ﺭﻭﯼ ONﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. –ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USBﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻋﻤﻠﯿﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺑﻮﺩ.
ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
۲۳ Fa
<QRD3230-A>82
)Black plate (77,1
ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ
FORMAT READ ﺩﯾﺴﮏ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺧﺮﺍﺷﯿﺪﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ،Bluetoothﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻓ ﻊ ﻋ ﯿ ﺐ
ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻨﻮﯾﺪ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ ،ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ
ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻋﻼﻣﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻋﻠﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ،ﺑﺪﻭﻥ
ﺗﺄﺧﯿﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
ERROR-10, 11, 12, 15, 17, 30, A0 ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Bluetoothﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ .ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ
ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﯾﺪ.
ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.
ﯾﮏ ﺧﻄﺎﯼ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﯾﮑﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯿﮑﯽ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
NO AUDIO ﺳﻮﻳﻴﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ،ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺭﺍ
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﯽ ﺩﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ Bluetoothﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﻔﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻫﯿﭻ ﺻﺪﺍﯾﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USBﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ Bluetoothﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ
ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ۳۰ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻋﻤﻠﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ.
ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ERROR-15 ﺍﺳﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ Bluetoothﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪ،
ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﻭﺩﯼ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USBﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ Bluetooth
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ،ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ.
ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ Bluetoothﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USBﭘﻴﺮﻭﯼ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭﯼ ،ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺑﺤﺎﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ ،ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺳﭙﺲ
ERROR-23
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ Bluetoothﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﻔﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﮎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ/ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ
SKIPPED ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺳﯽ ﺩﯼ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻋﻘﺐ ،ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ.
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USBﻣﺘﺼﻞ ،ﺣﺎﻭﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
DRMﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.
FORMAT READ
ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﻄﺎ
ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻨﻮﯾﺪ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﯾﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮑﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ،Pioneer
ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ Folder repeat
PROTECT ﺗﺄﺧﯿﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
)ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ( ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩ.
ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ
ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﯾﺪ. ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻋﻠﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ
ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ،USBﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ DRM ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ .ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ
ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.
NO AUDIO ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USBﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. NO XXXXﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ
ﺩﯾﺴﮑﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ ﻫﯿﭻ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺸﯽ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ. .(NO TITLE
NOT COMPATIBLE ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﻫﯿﭻ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﯾﺴﮏ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ.
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ USBﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. AMP ERROR ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﯾﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺗﺮﺍﮎ/ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
! ﯾﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ USBﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ SKIPPED
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﺮﺩ ،ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﺩﯾﺴﮑﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ.
ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
! ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ USB DRMﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺘﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ/ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ
ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ،ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ
ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ،ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﯾﺎ ﯾﮏ
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ SDﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ Pioneerﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ. ﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ.
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ PROTECT ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ،ﺍﺯ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ
SDﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﯾﺴﮏ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ DRMﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. ERROR ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﯾﯽ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ.
CHECK USB ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ Bluetoothﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﯾﯽ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ.
ﺭﺍﺑﻂ USBﯾﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ USBﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ Bluetoothﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ ﺩﺭ
ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ USBﯾﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ USBﮔﯿﺮ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ )USB ،SD)/iPod ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻧﺪﯾﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ،ﺻﺪﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ.
NO DEVICE ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﯽ ﺩﯼ
ﯾﮏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ Bluetoothﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ
ﻫﯿﭻ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USBﯾﺎ iPodﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ERROR-07, 11, 12, 17, 30 ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USB/iPodﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﮐﺜﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
Fa ۲۲
<QRD3230-A>83
)Black plate (76,1
ﺑﺨﺶ
2
1ﮔﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯿﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ
۲۱ Fa
<QRD3230-A>84
)Black plate (75,1
ﺑﺨﺶ
۲ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﭘﯿﭻ ﮔﻮﺷﺘﯽ ،ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ! ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻟﯿﺰﺭ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺁﻣﭙﻠﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﺮ ﺑﺮﻕ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﮐﺴﺘﺮﯼ/ﺳﯿﺎﻩ 9
ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﻠﺰﯼ ) ۹۰ﺩﺭﺟﻪ( ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﯼ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ .ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺪ( ﺳﺒﺰ a
ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮑﯽ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺑﺨﺎﺭﯼ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺳﺒﺰ/ﺳﯿﺎﻩ b
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻣﭙﻠﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
! ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﻬﯿﻨﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﻏﻮﺍﻧﯽ c
1 ﺯﺍﻭﯾﻪ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ۶۰ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺍﺭﻏﻮﺍﻧﯽ/ﺳﯿﺎﻩ d
1 3
2 ﺳﯿﺎﻩ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﯿﻦ( e
4 ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﻓﻠﺰﯼ ،ﺗﻤﯿﺰ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
60°
5 5 ﺯﺭﺩ f
ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ۱۲ﻭﻟﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
3
2 ﻗﺮﻣﺰ g
1 2 ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻮﯾﯿﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ) ۱۲ﻭﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ(
! ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻤﯿﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ 6
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ،ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﯾﺎﺩﯼ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ
ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
7 7
1ﺩﺍﺷﺒﻮﺭﺩ
ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﻫﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﺑﯽ/ﺳﻔﯿﺪ h
2ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ 3 ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﺁﻣﭙﻠﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﺮ ﺑﺮﻕ ﯾﺎ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﺖ
ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺗﻬﻮﯾﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ.
#ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﯼ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. 1 2 ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ۳۰۰ﻣﯿﻠﯽ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ۱۲ﻭﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ(
ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺎﭘﺎﯾﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﯾﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
8 ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
9 9 ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺠﯽ/ﺳﻔﯿﺪ i
ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ DINﺩﺭ ﻋﻘﺐ 5ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻓﻀﺎی ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ 1 ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮ ) ۴ﺃﻭﻡ( j
۱ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻼﺏ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺁﺑﯽ/ﺳﻔﯿﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ۷۰ﻭﺍﺕ ) ۲ﺃﻭﻡ( ،ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ k
ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ
ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮑﺪﯾﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ. ﺁﻣﭙﻠﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﺮ ﺑﺮﻕ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺪ( 2 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺭﻏﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺭﻏﻮﺍﻧﯽ/ﺳﯿﺎﻩ
5ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ
ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ) RCAﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ 3
ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﻨﺪ( ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻭ ﺳﺒﺰ/ﺳﯿﺎﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻋﻘﺐ 4 ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. l
ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﯼ ﻋﻘﺐ 5 ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮ ) ۴ﺃﻭﻡ( × ۲ m
ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ DINﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮ/ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺟﻠﻮ 6
ﻧﮑﺎﺕ
ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮ ﯾﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﯼ ﺟﻠﻮ 7
ﺩﻭ ﭘﯿﭻ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ۲ ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ۲ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﯾﯽ ،ﻫﯿﭻ ﭼﯿﺰﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﯿﻢ
ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﺮﺩ. ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺮ 8
ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﯿﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ،ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮ 9
! ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ .ﺑﻪ S/W control
1
3 )ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۸ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ
ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ DINﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﮏ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ.
۱ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺒﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﻣﻬﻢ
2 ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﮐﻢ ،ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ ،ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ !
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ،ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
1ﭘﯿﭻ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﯾﺪ ) ۸ × ۵ﻣﯿﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ( ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﯿﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻏﯿﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ !
2ﻗﻼﺏ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ
ﺳﺒﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
3ﺩﺍﺷﺒﻮﺭﺩ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻨﺴﻮﻝ
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ !
ﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﯿﻪ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ.
ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ: !
— ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﯿﻪ.
— ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺳﺮﻧﺸﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﯿﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﯽ
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ.
Fa ۲۰
<QRD3230-A>85
)Black plate (74,1
ﺑﺨﺶ
ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ،ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. — ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ
ﺳﯿﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﯿﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺳﯿﻢ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭼﺴﺐ —
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﯼ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺍﯾﻦ
6 ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺳﯿﻢ ﭘﯿﭽﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭼﺴﺐ
ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ
ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﻠﺰﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ
! ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ۵۰ﻭﺍﺕ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ( ﻭ ﺑﯿﻦ ۴ﺃﻭﻡ
1 23 45 7 8 ﺑﭙﯿﭽﺎﻧﯿﺪ.
L 1 R ﺗﺎ ۸ﺃﻭﻡ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ
ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺴﯿﺮ —
2 3 ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎﯼ ۱ﺃﻭﻡ ﺗﺎ ۳ﺃﻭﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﯽ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ.
4 ! ﺳﯿﻢ ﺳﯿﺎﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﯿﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ
6 8 ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮑﯽ —
F 7 9 ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﯾﺎ ﺁﻣﭙﻠﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻕ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ
ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺑﺨﺎﺭﯼ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ.
ba 9 ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺪ( ،ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺯﺭﺩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ،ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ —
ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﻠﺰﯼ
5 a c ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
R b d
ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺳﯿﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﯿﻦ ﺁﻣﭙﻠﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﺮ
ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﺎﯾﻖ —
ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﯾﺎ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ
c ﺑﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﯿﺪ.
ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﭘﯿﭻ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ.
e ﺍﺯ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. —
ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﯿﭻ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﯿﻦ ﺷﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﯾﺎ ﺑﯿﻔﺘﺪ ،ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ
f ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﮎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﺎ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ،ﭘﻮﺷﺶ —
ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﯼ ،ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪ ﺩﻭﺩ ﯾﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ
g ﻋﺎﯾﻖ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺒﺮﯾﺪ .ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺟﺮﯾﺎﻥ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪ
h ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ۱۵ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ 1 ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ.
i
ﻓﯿﻮﺯ ) ۱۰ﺁﻣﭙﺮ( 2 ﺍﺯ ﻓﯿﻮﺯﯼ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. —
ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ً
ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻣﻨﻔﯽ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﯿﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ. —
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﻣﭙﻠﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ 3
ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺩﺍﺭ 4 ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻔﯽ ﭼﻨﺪﯾﻦ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮑﺪﯾﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. —
ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﺮﺩ ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﯼ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ
1 )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺪ(. ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺁﺑﯽ/ﺳﻔﯿﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ
L R
2 3 ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﻣﯿﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ )ﻓﻘﻂ DEH-X9650BTﻭ DEH- 5 ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺁﻣﭙﻠﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﺮ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﯾﺎ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ
(X8650BT ﺗﻘﻮﯾﺖ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ۳۰۰ﻣﯿﻠﯽ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ۱۲ﻭﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻕ
4
6 8 ﻣﯿﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ )ﻓﻘﻂ DEH-X9650BTﻭ (DEH-X8650BT 6 ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ( ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺷﯿﺸﻪ ﺍﯼ
F 7 9 ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
۴ﻣﺘﺮ
ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻋﻘﺐ 7 ! ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺁﺑﯽ/ﺳﻔﯿﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺁﻣﭙﻠﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﺮ ﺑﺮﻕ
j
a c ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺟﻠﻮ 8 ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ .ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ
SW
b d ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ .ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺗﺨﻠﯿﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻬﻢ
ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮ 9
ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ) USB ۲ﻓﻘﻂ DEH-X9650BTﻭ DEH- a ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻨﯽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ ) ACCﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ
e k (X9650SD ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ( ﺭﻭﯼ ﺳﻮﯾﯿﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ،ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻪ
f a c ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ USB ۱ b ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺗﺨﻠﯿﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﻣﯽ
g l m ﺷﻮﺩ.
h ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ۱٫۵ USBﻣﺘﺮ c
b d
i
F O
OF
N
ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ 1
STAR
T
ﭼﭗ 2
ﺭﺍﺳ ﺖ 3 ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ ACC ﻣﺤﻞ ACC
ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﯼ ﺟﻠﻮ 4
ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﯼ ﻋﻘﺐ 5 ! ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ۱۲ﻭﻟﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﻔﯽ ﺑﻪ
ﺳﻔﯿﺪ 6 ﺯﻣﯿﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﯼ ﯾﺎ
ﺳﻔﯿﺪ/ﺳﯿﺎﻩ 7 ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺧﺎﮐﺴﺘﺮﯼ 8 ! ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ،ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﯾﺎ
ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ،ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
۱۹ Fa
<QRD3230-A>86
)Black plate (73,1
ﺑﺨﺶ
M.C. ۳ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ DEMO OFFﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ! Software Updateﺑﺮﺍﯼ DEH-X9650SDﻭ
ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ Bluetoothﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ
ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. DEH-X7650SDﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ.
ﭘﺎﮎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ،ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ
OFF/SRC ۱ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ
ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﭘﺎﮎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ
M.C.ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ YESﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ. ۴ ﺷﻮﺩ. ) FM stepﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ (FM
ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ.
ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ/ﮐﺪ ﭘﯿﻦ/ﺳﺎﺑﻘﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ/ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ
M.C.ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ۵ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ۲ 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ M.C. ،FMﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
۱۰۰) 100kHzﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(— ۵۰) 50kHzﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(
Clear memory YESﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﭘﺎﮎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ
۳ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻮ ،M.C.ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ،
) AM stepﮔﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ (AM ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ.
SYSTEMﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺩﺍﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ Bluetoothﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ M.C. ،AMﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ Cancelﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ
M.C. ۴ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
۹) 9kHzﮐﯿﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(— ۱۰) 10kHzﮐﯿﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۷ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ
2ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺎﮎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ) S/W controlﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮ(
Clearedﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ
ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ )ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﯼ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ Bluetoothﭘﺎﮎ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ AUX RCAﻋﻘﺐ( ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ! ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ،ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ.
) (Rear SP :F.Rangeﯾﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ
ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ AUXﻭﺍﺭﺩ ۱ ) ،(Rear SP :S/Wﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ) BT Version Info.ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ (Bluetooth
ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﻪ ،Rear SP :S/Wﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﯼ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻝ Bluetooth
ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤًﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻣﭙﻠﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﺮ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
OFF/SRC ۲ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ AUXﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﭘﺸﺖ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ
ﺷﻮﺩ. ! ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﯿﭻ ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮﯼ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ
ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ Rear SP :F.Range ،ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ )ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺑﺎ ) APP CONNECT MODEﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ (APP
ﻧﮑﺘﻪ
ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ(. ﯾﮏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﺸﺪﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ AUX ،ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ. ! ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﯿﭻ ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮﯼ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ) AUXﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ( ﺩﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ Rear SP :S/W ،ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ )ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮ(. ) Wiredﺑﺮﺍﯼ ) Bluetooth—(iPhoneﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ
ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۷ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ! ﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ،ﻫﯿﭻ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ(
ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ )ﺑﻪ Subwoofer1 ! ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺭﻭﯼ Pandoraﯾﺎ Appﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ
)ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۵ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ(.
ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
! ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ،ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ
ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
! ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﯼ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻋﻘﺐ RCAﺑﻄﻮﺭ
DISP OFF/MIX %ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ
ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ.
ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﻨﻮ
ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ.
OFF/SRC ۱ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ
) Software Updateﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ(
ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﯼ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ
ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ Bluetoothﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ۲
ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ ،ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ
Bluetoothﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ،ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
! ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ Bluetooth ۳ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻮ ،M.C.ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ،
ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ. SETUPﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ۱
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ M.C. ۴ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ.
۲ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻮ ،M.C.ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ،
،Bluetoothﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ،ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ
SYSTEMﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
Fa ۱۸
<QRD3230-A>87
)Black plate (72,1
ﺑﺨﺶ
ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ MIXTRAX
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ
ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ AUXﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ) ONﺭﻭﺷﻦ(—) OFFﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(
ﺳﺎﻝ—ﺭﻭﺯ—ﻣﺎﻩ ! ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ
) BRIGHTNESSﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ( M.C. 2ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ. ) Crossfade EFFECTﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﺪﺭﯾﺠﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ( MIX Fixedﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ) Clock Settingﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ( ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﺪﺭﯾﺠﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ! ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻫﺮﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ،LOOP EFFECT :
M.C. 2ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ. 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ، M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ،Echo EFFECT ،Flanger EFFECT
ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ 5 :ﺗﺎ 1 M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ) ONﺭﻭﺷﻦ(—) OFFﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ( Crush EFFECTﻭ .Crossfade EFFECT
ﺳﺎﻋﺖ—ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ—ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ
) Contrastﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ( M.C. 2ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ .MIX Settings ۱
ﻧﮑﺘﻪ
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ) EngineTime alertﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﭙﺮﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ( Crush EFFECT ،Flanger EFFECTﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ۲
M.C. 2ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ. Crossfade EFFECTﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ iPodﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ
ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ
ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﯾﺎ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺳﻄﺢ 0 ،ﺗﺎ 15ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻧﯿﺴﺘﻨﺪ. M.C. ۳ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ.
) Ever-scrollﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﮑﺮﻭﻝ( ﯾﮏ ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ ﻭ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ،ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﭘﯿﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ،ONﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ
M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ
30Minutes—15Minutes—OFF ) MIX Fixedﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ (MIXTRAX
ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ
ﮐﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺭﻭﯼ OFFﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ) Clockﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ( ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﯼ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ MIXTRAXﺣﺬﻑ
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ/ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﮑﺮﻭﻝ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ
M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
) BT AUDIOﻓﻌﺎﻟﺴﺎﺯﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ (Bluetooth ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ.
) ONﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﯼ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ(—) OFFﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ
M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ،Bluetoothﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ۱ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ(
) ONﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ( — ) Elapsed timeﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﭙﺮﯼ
BT Audioﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺷﺪﻩ( — ) OFFﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ( ) LOOP EFFECTﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ(
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ BT Audio ،M.C.ﺭﺍ ۲ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻮ ،M.C.ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ،
! ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ DEH-X9650SD
ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. SYSTEMﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﯼ ﻫﺮ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽ
ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ CLKﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
) PANDORAﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ (Pandora
) Auto PIﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ (PI M.C. ۳ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ. M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ،Pandoraﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ،ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ) ONﺭﻭﺷﻦ(—) OFFﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(
ﺣﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ
Pandoraﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﺪ. ) Flanger EFFECTﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﮔﯿﺮﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ(
ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ. ! BT Version Info. ،Clear memory ،BT AUDIO
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ M.C. ،PIﺭﺍ
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ Pandora ،M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭ APP CONNECT MODEﺑﺮﺍﯼ DEH-X9650SD ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﮔﯿﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ
ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﻭ DEH-X7650SDﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻧﯿﺴﺘﻨﺪ. ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
) Warning toneﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ( M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
) Clear memoryﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ Bluetoothﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ
) Language selectﭼﻨﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﯽ( ) ONﺭﻭﺷﻦ(—) OFFﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(
ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺮﻑ ﻣﺪﺕ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭ ،ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ
ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ،ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ .ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ) Echo EFFECTﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺍﮐﻮ(
ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺍﻧﮕﻠﯿﺴﯽ—ﺍﺳﭙﺎﻧﯿﺎﯾﯽ—ﭘﺮﺗﻐﺎﻟﯽ—ﻋﺮﺑﯽ— ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺍﮐﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ/ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
) AUXﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ( ) Calendarﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ( ) ONﺭﻭﺷﻦ(—) OFFﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(
۱۷ Fa
<QRD3230-A>88
)Black plate (71,1
ﺑﺨﺶ
۲ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻮ ،M.C.ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ، M.C. ۳ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ Key Sideﯾﺎ Display Side
ﺭﻧﮓ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺟﻠﻮﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﯾﮋﻩ MIXTRAXﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ
MIXTRAXﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ،ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺱ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ. ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
M.C. ۳ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ MIXTRAXﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ. M.C. ۴ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﺑﺮ
M.C. 2ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ. M.C. 2ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ،ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ MIXTRAXﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ.
! Sound Level Mode Color 1ﺑﻪ – Color 6 ! ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ) Whiteﺗﺎ (Blue
ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ MIXTRAXﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ
ﺍﻟﮕﻮﯼ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﻥ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ .ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ! ) Scanﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﺭﻧﮓ(
ﺷﻮﺩ. M.C. ۵ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
) Rﻗﺮﻣﺰ(—) Gﺳﺒﺰ(—) Bﺁﺑﯽ( ) Phoneﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻔﯿﺪ(
! Low Pass Mode Color 1ﺑﻪ – Color 6ﺍﻟﮕﻮﯼ
) SHORT PLAYBACKﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ(
ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﻥ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﺑﺎﺱ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ .ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﯾﮏ
M.C. ۶ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ،ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ 0 :ﺗﺎ 60
! – Flashing Color Randomﺍﻟﮕﻮﯼ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﻥ 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
#ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﺤﯽ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ 20ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺳﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ) Rﻗﺮﻣﺰ(G ،
ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﮔﺬﺭ M.C. 2ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ. M.C. 2ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
)ﺳﺒﺰ( ﻭ ) Bﺁﺑﯽ( ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ.
ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ. ۱ ) 1.0 MINﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ(—۱.۵ ) 1.5 MINﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ(—2.0 MIN ! – Flashingﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ Key Sideﭼﺸﻤﮏ
#ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﯿﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ
! – Sound Level Mode Randomﺍﻟﮕﻮﯼ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ) ۲ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ(—۲.۵ ) 2.5 MINﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ(—۳ ) 3.0 MINﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ(— ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ.
ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺯﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ. ) Randomﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ(—)OFFﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ( ! Flash FX 1ﺗﺎ – Flash FX 6ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ
! – Low Pass Mode Randomﺍﻟﮕﻮﯼ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﻥ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻣﯽ
) FLASH AREAﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﻥ(
ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﮔﺬﺭ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ. ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ Scanﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﻮﺭﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﯼ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ. ! – OFFﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﯾﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ،ﺭﻧﮓ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﯼ ﻧﻤﯽ
) DISP EFFECTﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ(
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﮐﻨﺪ.
ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﯾﮋﻩ MIXTRAXﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. M.C. 2ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ
) ILLUMI FXﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ(
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ) Key & Displayﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ(—KEY SIDE ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ MIXTRAX
M.C. 2ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ. )ﺑﺨﺶ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ(—) OFFﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ( ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ،ﯾﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻧﻮﺭﯼ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ
ﺍﺯ ﻓﻦ ﺁﻭﺭﯼ MIXTRAXﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﯿﻦ
) MIXTRAX 1ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ۱ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﯾﮋﻩ MIX- ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ OFFﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﮐﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﭘﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﯼ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ
ﺁﻫﻨﮓﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﯿﮑﺲ
) MIXTRAX 2— (TRAXﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ۲ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﯾﮋﻩ ILLUMINATIONﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ.
ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﯾﺪﺍﺭﯼ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
) OFF—(MIXTRAXﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ( ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ. M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ILLUMI FXﻓﺸﺎﺭ
ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
) CUT IN EFFECTﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺗﺪﺭﯾﺠﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ( ) Flashing Colorﺍﻟﮕﻮﯼ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﻥ(
! ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ/ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ،ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ACCﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ
ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﮎ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ. ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ILLUMI FXﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻧﻮﺭﯼ
ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ MIXTRAXﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ! ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻠﻮﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﯾﺪﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ MIXTRAﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎﺛﯿﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ.
M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ،ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﻪ
) ONﺭﻭﺷﻦ(—) OFFﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ( ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ MIXTRAXﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۷ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ
) MIX Settingsﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ (MIXTRAX ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ،Customﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻪ
ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ MIXTRAXﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۷ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ MIXTRAX
ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ
ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ Key Sideﻭ Display Sideﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ
CUT IN EFFECT ،SHORT PLAYBACKﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
MIX Settingsﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ MIXTRAXﻭ
ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺭﻭﯼ Appﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻏﯿﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ۱
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ۱
ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ MIXTRAXﺑﺮ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
M.C. ۲ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ILLUMINATIONﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ ﻭ
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
Fa ۱۶
<QRD3230-A>89
)Black plate (70,1
ﺑﺨﺶ
! ﻫﺮﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ) Preset EQﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﺍﮐﻮﻻﯾﺰﺭ(
ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ. ﻭ Reverseﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ M.C. .ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ
! (iPhone) Pandora ،SD ،iPod ،USBﻭ App ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
)(iPhone Normalﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ. 2ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺍﮐﻮﺍﻻﻳﺰﺭ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ.
! ) Pandora ,BT Audioﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ( ،ﻭ ) Appﺗﻠﻔﻦ —Custom1—Vocal—Natural—Powerful
) Subwoofer2ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮ( SuperBass—Flat—Custom2
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ۱ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ(
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﯾﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﺯ ) G.EQﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﮐﻮﺍﻻﻳﺰﺭ(
۲ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻮ ،M.C.ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ، 2ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ. ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.
ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ +4 :ﺗﺎ –4 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺍﮐﻮﺍﻻﻳﺰﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
ILLUMINATIONﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
2ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮ، ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺍﮐﻮﺍﻻﻳﺰﺭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ Custom1ﻳﺎ
M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. Custom2ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
M.C. ۳ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
! Custom1ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ
ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ،ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻫﺎﯼ 3ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻗﻄﻊ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ.
ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ،ﻫﺮﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ
! Phoneﺑﺮﺍﯼ DEH-X9650SDﻭ DEH-X7650SD 125Hz—100Hz—80Hz—63Hz—50Hz
ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ 4ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ. ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ.
ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ.
ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﯾﺎ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺳﻄﺢ +6 ،ﺗﺎ –24ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ! (iPhone) Pandora ،SD ،iPod ،USBﻭ App
)(iPhone
) Key Sideﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ( ) Bass Boosterﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﻤﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ( ! ) Pandora ,BT Audioﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ( ،ﻭ ) Appﺗﻠﻔﻦ
ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ(
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ! Custom2ﯾﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﮎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ
M.C. 2ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
M.C. 2ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ.
ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﯾﺎ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺳﻄﺢ 0 ،ﺗﺎ +6ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
! ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ) Whiteﺗﺎ (Blue ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﯾﺪ. 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
! ) Scanﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﺭﻧﮓ( ) HPFﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ( 2ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﯾﺮ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ:
! ) Customﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ( ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ۱ ﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﮐﻮﻻﯾﺰﺭ—ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﮐﻮﻻﯾﺰﺭ
ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ،ﺍﺯ
M.C. 3ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
) Display Sideﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ( ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻓﯿﻠﺘﺮ
۲ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻮ ،M.C.ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ، ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﮐﻮﻻﯾﺰﺭ:
ﺑﺎﻻﮔﺬﺭ ) (HPFﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ.
ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ENTERTAINMENTﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. 8kHz—3.15kHz—1.25kHz—315Hz—100Hz
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﮐﻮﻻﯾﺰﺭ +6 :ﺗﺎ –6
M.C. 2ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﯿﻠﺘﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. M.C. ۳ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ) Loudnessﺑﻠﻨﺪﯼ(
M.C. 2ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ—ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ—ﺳﺒﮏ—ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ۱ 3ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻗﻄﻊ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ.
! ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ) Whiteﺗﺎ (Blue —ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ —۲ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ —۳ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﭘﺲ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﮐﻢ ﺭﺍ
125Hz—100Hz—80Hz—63Hz—50Hz
! ) Scanﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﺭﻧﮓ( ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ —۴ﺗﺤﻠﯿﻞ ﮔﺮ ﻃﯿﻒ—ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ—ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ—ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﮐﺮﺩ.
! ) Customﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ( 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
M.C.ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ۴ M.C. 2ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﯼ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
) Key & Displayﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ(
M.C. 3ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ) Lowﮐﻢ(—) Midﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(—) Highﺯﯾﺎﺩ(
! ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ،ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﺒﮏ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ.
۱۵ Fa
<QRD3230-A>90
)Black plate (69,1
ﺑﺨﺶ
ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ! ﺗﻀﻤﯿﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ
ﻣﻬﻢ
ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ۱ DEH-X8650BT/DEH-X9650BT ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ
1 ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ iPhone ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﯾﯽ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ
۲ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻮ ،M.C.ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ، ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﯼ ﯾﺎ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ،
FUNCTIONﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ iPhoneﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ USBﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ۱ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﺹ ،ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ
ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
M.C. ۳ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ. Wired ۲ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ APP CONNECT MODEﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ،ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ
ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ،ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻪ APP CONNECT MODE ﺩﻫﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﺳﺖ ،ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﯾﺖ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻭﺭﯼ
2 3 4 5 )ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ (APPﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۸ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻭ ﺍﯾﻤﻨﯽ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﯾﻢ
) Pauseﻣﮑﺚ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ DEH-X9650SDﻭ DEH- ﺷﺨﺼﯽ .ﺑﺎ ﭘﺬﯾﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ،ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ
DEH-X7650SD/DEH-X9650SD ،X7650SDﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ. ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ ﻭ ﺳﯿﺎﺳﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺣﺮﯾﻢ
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. 1 ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯽ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﻭ
ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ Appﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ۳ ﺳﯿﺎﺳﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻫﺮﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻧﯿﺴﺘﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ
) Sound Retrieverﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ(
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺭﺿﺎﯾﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ،
۴ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﯼ iPhoneﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ.
M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ.
) OFF—2—1ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﻭ 2ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺎﻻﯼ
ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ.
2 4 5 3 ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ
ﻫﺎﯼ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ
ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ 1
ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ PAUSE/PLAY 2 ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ DEH-X9650BTﻭ DEH-X8650BT ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ
ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ S.Rtrv 3 ﻭﯾﮋﻩ iPhoneﯾﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ۱ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻦ ﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ
ﺷﻮﺩ. Bluetoothﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ، ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ iPhone
ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ )ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ( 4 ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۰ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ! ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ iPhoneﻭ iPod touchﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﯼ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ 5 ! ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ۵٫۰ iOSﯾﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
Bluetooth ۲ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ APP CONNECT MODEﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ
ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺮﺍﮎ
ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻪ APP CONNECT MODE ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ۱ )ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ (APPﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۸ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
LEVER 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ. ! ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ۲٫۳ Android OSﯾﺎ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
! ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ) Bluetooth SPPﻧﻤﺎﯾﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺳﺮﯼ( ﻭ
۲ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻮ ،M.C.ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ، ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﯾﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ Appﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ۳ ) A2DPﻧﻤﺎﯾﻪ ﺗﻮﺯﯾﻊ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ( ﭘﯿﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ.
AUDIOﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. LEVER 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﯾﺎ ﭼﭗ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ. ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ Bluetoothﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﯼ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ۴ ! ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﯼ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ Androidﺗﻀﻤﯿﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
M.C. ۳ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ/BAND ، ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪ،
ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ،ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
! ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺳﺎﺑﻮﻭﻓﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭ
ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻧﮑﺎﺕ
! ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ FMﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ SLA ،ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ! ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﯼ iPhoneﯾﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎﯼ
ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ. ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺑﺴﺎﯾﺖ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ
ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ
ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
DISP/ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. % ! Pioneerﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﯼ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﯾﺎ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ.
Fa ۱۴
<QRD3230-A>91
)Black plate (68,1
ﺑﺨﺶ
) Bookmarkﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ( ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ Shuffle DEH-X7650SD/DEH-X9650SD Wired ۲ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ APP CONNECT MODEﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
)ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ(/ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ 12 ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻪ APP CONNECT MODE
)ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ (APPﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۸ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ DEH-X9650SDﻭ DEH-
) New stationﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ( ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
،X7650SDﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ.
ﯾﮏ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪ ،ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﯾﺎ ﺳﺒﮏ ۱ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ) Shuffleﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ
ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ Pandoraﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ۳
)ﻟﯿﺴﺖ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ(/ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ،
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. 3 5 6 4
M.C. 2ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
۴ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﯼ iPhoneﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﭘﺨﺶ
۲ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ) Shuffleﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ( ﯾﺎ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﯿﺎﺯ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ/ﻣﻨﻔﯽ 1 ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ.
) From Trackﺍﺯ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ( —) From Artistﺍﺯ ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪ(— ﻧﻈﺮ ،ﺍﺯ M.C.ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
) From Genreﺍﺯ ﺳﺒﮏ(
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ 2
M.C. 3ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ PAUSE/PLAY 3 ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ
ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ S.Rtrv
ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ From Trackﯾﺎ ،From Artistﯾﮏ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ )ﻟﯿﺴﺖ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. 1
4 ﻫﺎﯼ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ
ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ
! – ABCﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ DEH-X9650BTﻭ DEH-X8650BT
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ،From Genreﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ
ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ )ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ( 5
ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﻤﯿﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ! – DATEﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ۱ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻦ ﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ
M.C. 4ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺳﺒﮏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ 6
ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ Bluetoothﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ،
M.C. 5ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۰ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
M.C. 6ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ) Shuffleﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ( ﯾﺎ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ
M.C. 7ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ
Bluetooth ۲ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ APP CONNECT MODEﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ
ﯾﮏ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪ. iPhoneﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۲ﯾﺎ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ
ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻪ APP CONNECT MODE
! ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ New stationﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۳ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
1ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ) Shuffleﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ( ﯾﺎ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ )ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ (APPﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۸ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ. ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﭘﺮﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ
) Pauseﻣﮑﺚ( LEVER 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ. ۳ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ Pandoraﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ
1ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ. ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﻧﻤﻮﺩ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﺮﺩ ،ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ
DELETE YESﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ/BAND ،
ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ.
) Sound Retrieverﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ( ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ DISP/ ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ .ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ.
ﺍﻣﺘﯿﺎﺯ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ
M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. M.C. 2ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ “ﺍﻣﺘﯿﺎﺯ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ” ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮕﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺖUP ،
) OFF—2—1ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ( ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ. DEH-X8650BT/DEH-X9650BT
ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﻭ 2ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺎﻻﯼ 12
ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺍﻣﺘﯿﺎﺯ ﻣﻨﻔﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ
ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ “ﺍﻣﺘﯿﺎﺯ ﻣﻨﻔﯽ” ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮕﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ۱ ﭘﺮﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ DOWN ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ
۲ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻮ ،M.C.ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ،
ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ 3 4 5 6
FUNCTIONﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ
ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﯼ iPhoneﯾﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺻﺮﻓًﺎ M.C. ۳ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ. DISP/ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. %
ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ،ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻧﮑﺘﻪ
ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ،ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ.
۱۳ Fa
<QRD3230-A>92
)Black plate (67,1
ﺑﺨﺶ
ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ
! ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ Pandoraﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﯾﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ Bluetoothﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ.
ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮﯼ Pioneerﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭﻫﺎ ،ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺍﺯ ! ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ Bluetoothﻣﺘﺼﻞ ،ﻣﻤﮑﻦ
LEVER 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﯾﺎ ﭼﭗ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ. ﺣﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ Bluetooth !
ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ Pandoraﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ.
ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ،ﭘﺨﺶ
ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﻤﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ :ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ! ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ Bluetoothﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ، ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺮﺍﮎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ.
ﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ،ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ،ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. LEVER 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ. ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ Bluetoothﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ !
ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ،ﺧﺮﯾﺪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺍﺯ ،iTunesﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ،
) Sound Retrieverﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ( ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ ،ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ
ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﻪ ،Pandoraﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ.
/BAND 1ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﯾﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ.
ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ Pandoraﯾﮏ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ Pioneerﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﯽ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ) OFF—2—1ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(
http://www.pandora.comﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ Bluetooth
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﻭ 2ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺎﻻﯼ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ Pandoraﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ iPhoneﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ Bluetoothﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ
ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻟﻄﻔًﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ Bluetooth
ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﯼ ،ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ
www.pandora.com/everywhere/mobileﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ DISP/ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. % Bluetoothﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﻔﺖ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺟﺮﯾﺎﻥ Pandoraâ
ﻣﻬﻢ: ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ 1ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ
ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ iPhone ﻣﻠﺰﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ Pandoraﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ Bluetoothﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ۱
ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮﯼ :Pioneer ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۰ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ iPhoneﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ USBﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ۱
! ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ Pandoraﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﯿﺎ ﻭ ﻧﯿﻮﺯﻟﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ
۲ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻮ ،M.C.ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ،
ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ.
FUNCTIONﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
! ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ،ﻟﻄﻔًﺎ ﻣﯿﺎﻥ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ Pandoraﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﺗﺮﯾﻦ
ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
M.C. ۳ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ،ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Fa ۱۲
<QRD3230-A>93
)Black plate (66,1
ﺑﺨﺶ
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ًﻻ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ) Auto pairingﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ( ) Auto connectﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ (Bluetooth
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. 1
ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻧﺸﺪ ،ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ iPhoneﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ USBﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺬﻑ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ 2
ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ/ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ.
ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺑﻪ Visibility
iPhoneﺭﺍ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ) Visibilityﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ( ! ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ Bluetoothﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ
)ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۱ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ.
M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ) ABC Searchﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎﻳﯽ( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ Bluetoothﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ
ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ Delete YESﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ. 3
ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻫﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ.
! ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ iOSﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ 4
2ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ
ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ. ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ.
! ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ USB۲ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ. ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﯿﭻ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ، !
3ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
) Pin code inputﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ( ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ.
M.C. 4ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ،ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ. !
5ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Bluetoothﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺪ PINﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ
6ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ 0000ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻭﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ) Add deviceﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ(
ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ. ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ، ۱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
7ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
M.C. ۲ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ. M.C. 2ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ. ! ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻟﻐﻮ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
) Phone Functionﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ( ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ،ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ! ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻫﯿﭻ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﯼ ﺭﺍ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﺪ،
3ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ
ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ Ring tone ،Auto answerﻭ PH.B.Name ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. Not foundﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
viewﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ) Missed callsﺳﺎﺑﻘﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ( 4ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ. 2ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ
ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۱ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ) Dialled callsﺳﺎﺑﻘﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ( ! ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ،ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ M.C.ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ.
) Received callsﺳﺎﺑﻘﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ( ﮐﺪ ﭘﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺯﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﯾﺪ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﺪ ﭘﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ! ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮRE-SEARCH ،
ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. 1 ) Device INFOﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ (Bluetooth
! ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ Bluetoothﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ. 2 ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ.
۱ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ .Phone Function 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. 3 3ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﺑﻪ ) Phone Functionﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۱ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ M.C. 2ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ! ! ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﮑﻤﯿﻞ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ،ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ )Pioneer BT
ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ—ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ Bluetooth
ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ. (Unitﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ،ﮐﺪ PINﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ
) Guest Modeﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﯿﻬﻤﺎﻥ( ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ۲ ) PhoneBookﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ(
! ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ 0000ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ
ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
M.C. ۳ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺟﻔﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻔﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ
! ﯾﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺶ ﺭﻗﻤﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ
ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ،ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ Delete deviceﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ Bluetoothﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻪ
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺶ ﺭﻗﻤﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ
) Auto answerﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮﻳﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ( ) Delete deviceﺣﺬﻑ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ Bluetoothﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
۱۰ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
! ﻋﺪﺩ ۶ﺭﻗﻤﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ/ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮﻳﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﯿﻬﻤﺎﻥ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺤﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
! ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﮑﻤﯿﻞ
) Ring toneﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ( ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ
ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ/ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ! ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻔﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ،
) PH.B.Name viewﻧﻤﺎﯼ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ( Device Fullﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ
ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ،ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ
M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
۱۱ Fa
<QRD3230-A>94
)Black plate (65,1
ﺑﺨﺶ
ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ Bluetooth 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﻫﻤﻪ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﻧﮑﻨﻨﺪ. 1ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ LEVER ،ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ.
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ Shuffle OFF ،Shuffle allﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ
! ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻬﻢ
Shuffle modeﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻪ
ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ، ۱ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ. ! ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ) Shuffle modeﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۰ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ
#ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ. ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ Bluetoothﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ
ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. 1ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ /BAND ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
M.C. ۲ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ. ! ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ. ) Link playﭘﺨﺶ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﯼ(
ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ،ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ! ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ
ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ،ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﯼ
) Device listﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ /ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ. 2ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ؛ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ،ﻓﺸﺎﺭ
ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ.
ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ ،ﺣﺘﻤًﺎ ﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﯿﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﺍﻣﻦ ﭘﺎﺭﮎ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. 1 ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﯾﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۹ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ 2 ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ iPhoneﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﺻﺪﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ
ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ) Pauseﻣﮑﺚ(
ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ. ﻃﺮﯾﻖ Bluetoothﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ.
! ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ Bluetoothﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮﯼ
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ. ۱ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﺻﺪﺍ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ/ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. 3 ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ. 1ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ
) Audiobooksﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﭽﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ(
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ Connected ،ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ Bluetoothﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﯿﭻ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ، ! M.C. ۲ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۰ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ. ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﯿﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﺻﺪﺍ /BAND ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ Bluetoothﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ
) Delete deviceﺣﺬﻑ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ(
ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۱ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
Fa ۱۰
<QRD3230-A>95
)Black plate (64,1
ﺑﺨﺶ
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ iPodﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ Pandora ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ LINK PLAY 1
ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ iPodﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ 2
1ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻘﻮﻟﻪ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ.
ﻣﻨﺒﻊ Pandoraﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ 3
ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ iPodﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ iPodﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ
ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ 4
ﺁﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩ.
1ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ
DISP/ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ. ۱ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ PAUSE/PLAY 5
Ctrl iPodﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎﯼ iPodﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ.
ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎﻳﯽ، ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ S.Rtrv 6
! ﻧﺴﻞ iPod nano ۱
M.C. 2ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
M.C. ۲ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ
! iPodﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﯾﺪﯾﻮﯾﯽ
3ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎﻳﯽ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
) Trackﺍﺯ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ( —) Artistﺍﺯ ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪ( ﺷﻮﺩ.
! ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ DISP/ ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ )ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ( 7
ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. %ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ/BAND ،
M.C. ۳ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ 8
! – Ctrl iPodﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ iPodﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ
ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ Pandoraﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻟﯿﺴﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ
ﻃﺮﻳﻖ iPodﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩ.
! ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ Pandoraﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺩﺭ iPod
! – Ctrl Audioﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ iPodﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ
) (MusicSphereﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ 1ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ iPodﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ USBﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩ.
ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ. M.C.ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ. ۴ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺮﺍﮎ )ﻗﺴﻤﺖ(
ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ! ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ LEVER 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ.
! ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ،Ctrl iPodﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ ) (MusicSphereﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ M.C. ۵ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ،ﺍﺯ iPodﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. ﯾﮏ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪ. ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﯾﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ
ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. LEVER 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﯾﺎ ﭼﭗ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ.
ﻧﮑﺘﻪ
! ﺣﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ Ctrl iPodﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ
ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﯿﭻ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﯼ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ
ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ UP 1ﯾﺎ DOWNﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ. ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻏﯿﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
— ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ
• ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺍﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ
— ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ/ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ
• ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ! ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﻭﯼ Ctrl Audioﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ
— ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ )ﻗﺴﻤﺖ(
• ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﮐﻼﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ )ﻟﯿﺴﺖ( ۱ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ، ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ iPodﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ.
! ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ! ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ iPodﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ،ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ۱ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﯼ، ! ﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ﺩﻭ ﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﻮﻳﻴﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ
ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻘﻮﻟﻪ/ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ،ﺍﺯ M.C.ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ۲ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ iPod ،ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ۱
۲ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ؛ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ،ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻘﻮﻟﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ MIXTRAX
۲ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻮ ،M.C.ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ، ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ.
FUNCTIONﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ! – Artistﺁﻟﺒﻮﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻭﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ) Playlistsﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺨﺶ(—) Artistsﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪﺍﻥ(— ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ MIXTRAX
ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ) Albumsﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ(—) Songsﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ(—Podcasts DISP OFF/MIX 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ MIX-
M.C. ۳ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ. ! – Albumﺁﻫﻨﮕﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ،ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. )ﭘﺎﺩﮐﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ(—) Genresﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎ(—Composers TRAXﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ،ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ! – Genreﺁﻟﺒﻮﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻼﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ،ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. )ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺳﺎﺯﺍﻥ(—) Audiobooksﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ( ! ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ،MIXTRAXﺑﻪ
! ،Shuffle all ،Shuffle mode ،Play mode ﺁﻫﻨﮓ/ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ،ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ. ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ MIXTRAXﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۶ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﭘﺨﺶ
Link playﻭ Audiobooksﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ
ﻧﮑﺎﺕ 1ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
Ctrl iPodﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ
! ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﯼ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ
ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ iPod
)ﻣﺜ ًﻼ ،ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ( ،ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ 1ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻘﻮﻟﻪ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ iPodﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۹ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ
ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ/ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺷﻮﺩ.
! ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺨﺶ ،ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﯼ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ
DISP/ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. %
ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﯼ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ/ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.
۹ Fa
<QRD3230-A>96
)Black plate (63,1
ﺑﺨﺶ
! ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺨﺶ ،ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﯼ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ
) Music browseﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ(
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ/ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﯼ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ/ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. ! ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﺴﻬﯿﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻫﺎﯼ ،Albums ،Artists
ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USBﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ SDﺭﺍ Songsﻭ ،Genresﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﯾﮏ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ
) Link playﭘﺨﺶ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﯼ(
ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﯽ ﺑﺎ ۱۰۰۰ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ،ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ۷۰ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﯽ
! – ONﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ /ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ۱
2ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ؛ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ،ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﮐﺸﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ۳۰۰۰ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ
ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ! – OFFﺍﺯ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ/ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ. ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ .ﻟﻄﻔًﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ
ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﭘﯿﺎﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺳﺪ ﮐﻪ ۲ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻮ ،M.C.ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ،
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ
ﺁﯾﺎ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﯾﺎ ﭘﺎﯾﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ. FUNCTIONﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۸ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮﯼ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ.
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﯾﻦ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ،ﺑﺎ ﺗﮑﻤﯿﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ! ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ
) Pauseﻣﮑﺚ( ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. M.C. ۳ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
،USBﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
M.C. 2ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ Yesﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ. ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ،ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
! ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ،ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎ
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. M.C. 3ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ! ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ Music browseﻭ Link playﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ
ﺗﺄﺛﯿﺮﯼ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ.
ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺭﻭﯼ CDﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ.
) Sound Retrieverﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ( ﭘﯿﺎﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﯾﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ! ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ،ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.
ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﯾﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ /USB ! Link playﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ OFFﺩﺭ Music browseﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ
ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﯿﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻪ
ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ.
ﮐﺎﺭﺕ SDﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ.
) Music browseﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۸ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ
ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺩﺭ
M.C. 4ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ Yesﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ.
M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ
M.C. 5ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
) OFF—2—1ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ( ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ No ،ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ USBﯾﺎ SDﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﻭ 2ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺎﻻﯼ ! ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ACCﺭﻭﯼ ،OFFﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﯾﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ONﺩﺭ Music browseﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ
ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﯾﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ /USBﮐﺎﺭﺕ SDﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻪ
ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ /USBﮐﺎﺭﺕ SDﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ) Music browseﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۸ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
iPod ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ACCﺭﻭﯼ ONﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ
ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺭﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ! ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ /USBﮐﺎﺭﺕ SD • ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺍﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ
ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﯾﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ • ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ
DEH-X8650BT/DEH-X9650BT
/USBﮐﺎﺭﺕ SDﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ • ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﮐﻼﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ
1 2 3 4 ﻣﺠﺪﺩًﺍ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﭘﯿﺎﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ
ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﯾﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﭘﺎﯾﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩًﺍ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ۱ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﯼ،
ﺧﯿﺮ. ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ.
) Play modeﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ( ۲ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ؛ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ،ﻓﺸﺎﺭ
ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
5 6 7 8 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ! – Artistﺁﻟﺒﻮﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻭﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ
CD/CD-R/CD-RW ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ.
DEH-X7650SD/DEH-X9650SD ! – Disc repeatﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﺍﮎ ﻫﺎ ! – Albumﺁﻫﻨﮕﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ،ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ.
1 2 3 4 ! – Track repeatﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺮﺍﮎ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ! – Genreﺁﻟﺒﻮﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻼﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ،ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ.
! – Folder repeatﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ/ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ،ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ.
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ )(USB ،SD
! – All repeatﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ
! – Track repeatﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ! ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﯼ
! – Folder repeatﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ )ﻣﺜ ًﻼ ،ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ( ،ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ
5 7 8 6 ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ/ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺷﻮﺩ.
) Random modeﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ(
Fa ۸
<QRD3230-A>97
)Black plate (62,1
ﺑﺨﺶ
ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ )ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ( ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ Pandora ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﮏ CD/CD-R/CD-RW
1ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ SDﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﯿﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USBﺑﺎ ﯾﺶ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ 1ﺩﯾﺴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﯾﺴﮏ
ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ-ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ. ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ
ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ /BAND 1ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
1ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ. ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ CD/CD-R/CD-RW
ﻣﻨﺒﻊ Pandoraﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ! ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺑﯿﻦ ۳۲ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ.
) h 1ﺧﺮﻭﺝ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ MTP
ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ DISP/ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ. ۱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USB
ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ،MTPﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﯼ Androidﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ
1ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USBﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ USB
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ USBﯾﺎ SDﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ) MTPﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ۴٫۰ Androidﯾﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ
M.C. ۲ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻣﻨﺒﻊ USBﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ،Androidﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ
) Trackﺍﺯ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ( —) Artistﺍﺯ ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪ( ! ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ Pioneer USBﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ
ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ONﺩﺭ Music browseﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
USBﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻪ ! ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ MIXTRAXﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ.
M.C. ۳ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
) Music browseﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۸ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ! ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ WAVﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ. ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USB
ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ Pandoraﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻟﯿﺴﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ
! ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ. 1ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USBﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
Pandoraﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ.
)ﻟﯿﺴﺖ( ۱ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ،
ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ SD
ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﻧﮑﺎﺕ
M.C.ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ. ۴ 1ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ SDﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ SDﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
! ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ،USBﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺁﻥ
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻘﻮﻟﻪ/ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ،ﺍﺯ M.C.ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ۲
M.C. ۵ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﯼ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ
ﯾﮏ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪ. ! ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USBﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﯼ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻘﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ. ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺳﺖ. OFF/SRC 2ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ SDﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
) Artistsﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪﺍﻥ(—) Albumsﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ(—Songs ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﯿﭻ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﯼ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ! ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ،ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ
)ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ(—) Genresﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎ( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻏﯿﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USBﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ SD
1ﺭﻭﯼ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ SDﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﻪ
ﭘﺨﺶ
1ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ/ﺗﺮﺍﮎ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ MIXTRAX ﮔﻮﺵ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ.
ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ SDﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ
ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ 2ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ SDﺭﺍ ﺑﯿﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﯿﺎﻭﺭﯾﺪ.
ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ OFFﺩﺭ Music browseﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ MIXTRAX
1ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻘﻮﻟﻪ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ USBﯾﺎ SDﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ
ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ) Music browseﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۸ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. UP 1ﯾﺎ DOWNﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
1ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻘﻮﻟﻪ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ. ﻧﻤﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ USB MTPﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺮﺍﮎ
)ﻟﯿﺴﺖ( ﺭﺍ ۱ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ/ﺗﺮﺍﮎ، DISP OFF/MIX 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ MIX-
ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ LEVER 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ.
ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. TRAXﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
1ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ
! ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ،MIXTRAXﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﯾﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ
ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎﻳﯽ،
۲ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ )ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ( ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ،ﺍﺯ M.C. ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ MIXTRAXﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۶ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. LEVER 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﯾﺎ ﭼﭗ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ.
M.C. 2ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ! ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ،ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ
3ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎﻳﯽ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ.
! ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ DISP/ ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺭﻳﺸﻪ
M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ. ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ
/BAND 1ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ.
ﭘﺨﺶ DISP/ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. % ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ CD-DA
1ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﮎ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. /BAND 1ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
۷ Fa
<QRD3230-A>98
)Black plate (61,1
ﺑﺨﺶ
CD/CD-R/CD-RWﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ) PTYﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ( ،ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ
M.C. ۳ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻧﮑﺎﺕ
ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ،ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ! ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﯾﺪ ،ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺠﺎﯼ
ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ )(USB ،SD ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
! ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ،AMﻓﻘﻂ Local ،BSMﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﯾﯽ ﺷﺪ،
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ Tuning Modeﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
LEVER 2ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﯾﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ
ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ. ! ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ،ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
DEH-X8650BT/DEH-X9650BT ) BSMﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ(
Others—Classics—Popular—News&Inf
1 2 3 M.C. 3ﺭﺍﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ) BSMﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ( ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺷﺶ
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﯼ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ
ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﺑﺎ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﯾﮏ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ،ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮ
ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ M.C. BSMﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺧﯿﺮ ﻭ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ
! ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻟﻐﻮ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
! ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﯾﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﻟﯿﺴﺖ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ،
4 5 6 7 ) Regionalﻣﺤﻠﯽ( ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ.
ﺗﻮﺳﻂ PTYﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ.
DEH-X7650SD/DEH-X9650SD ! ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﯿﭻ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ،ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ،Alternative FREQﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﯿﭻ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩNO ،
ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ Not found ،ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ TEXTﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ.
1 2 3 2ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﺳﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ،
ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻮﺝ ﯾﺎﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ. ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ.
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ LEVERﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﯾﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ.
) Traffic Announceﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﺗﺮﺍﻓﯿﮏ(
ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. UP 3ﯾﺎ DOWNﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﻭ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﺗﺮﺍﻓﯿﮏ، ) Localﻣﻮﺝ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻳﯽ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ( ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ
ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ
M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺶ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﻩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﯼ
4 6 7 5 ﻣﻮﺝ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎﯼ RT MEMO 1ﺗﺎ RT MEMO 6ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
) Alternative FREQﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻦ( ﺑﯿﺎﺑﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ. 1ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯼ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯽ
ﻧﺮﺥ ﺑﯿﺖ/ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ 1 ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺝ ﯾﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺩﻫﺪ.
ﻧﺮﺥ ﺑﯿﺖ ﯾﺎ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ )ﻓﺎﯾﻞ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﯽ M.C. 2ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. )ﻟﯿﺴﺖ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. 2
ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. ﮐﻨﺪ. M.C. 3ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
! ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ AACﺑﺎ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎM.C. ، Level 4—Level 3—Level 2—Level 1 :FM 3ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ LEVERﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
) VBRﻧﺮﺥ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ( ،ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﺮﺥ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. Level 2—Level 1 :AM ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ
ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ ،ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﻮﯼ ﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ.
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ،AACﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ VBR ) News interruptﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ( ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ 4ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯼ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ،ﺍﺯ LEVERﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺿﻌﯿﻒ ﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮ ،ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ M.C. .ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ) NEWSﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ(M.C. ،
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ 2 ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ) PTY searchﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ(
ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ
ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. ) Tuning Modeﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﻮﺝ ﯾﺎﺏ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ( ! ﻣﻮﺝ ﯾﺎﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﯼ
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﻪ 3 ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯼ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺪﯾﻤﯽ ﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ
ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ LEVERﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ PAUSE/PLAY 4 ﺟﺪﯾﺪﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ.
) Manualﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﻭ
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ S.Rtrv 5
ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﯾﺎ ) Presetﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ
ﺷﺪﻩ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ
ﺷﻮﺩ.
M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ Manualﯾﺎ Presetﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ )ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ( 6 ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ M.C.ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ۱
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ 7
۲ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻮ ،M.C.ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ،
FUNCTIONﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
Fa ۶
<QRD3230-A>99
)Black plate (60,1
ﺑﺨﺶ
ﻧﮑﺘﻪ 1 23 4 5 6 7 ! ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ،Tuning Modeﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ.
) Tuning Modeﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﻮﺝ ﯾﺎﺏ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۶ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ! ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺯﻣﯿﻦ ﻭ ﮔﯿﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﯾﺮ
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ
ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﭘﺪﺍﻝ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﯾﺎ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
1ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ
ﺟﻠﻮﯾﯽ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ.
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ PI
b ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻪ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ،ﺑﺮﺁﻣﺪﮔﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﯿﻨﯽ
ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺝ ﯾﺎﺏ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﺪ ﯾﺎ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﯿﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ.
ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻏﯿﺮ RDSﯾﺎ AM
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪ
ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ PI SEEK .ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ 1ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ.
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ 1 ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ
ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. 2ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ) (+ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﯽ )–( ﺑﻪ
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ News 2 ﺑﻪ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ/ﻣﻘﻮﻟﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﯾﺪ )ﭘﻮﺷﻪ/ﻣﻘﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ Traffic Announce 3 ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ PIﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(
5ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ )ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ( 4 DISP/ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. 1
ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ 5
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ LOC 6 ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ
ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ PI ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ /BAND 1ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ. ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ/ﻣﻘﻮﻟﻪ
! ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ PIﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﻪ Auto PI ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎﻝ 7 /BAND 1ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
)ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ (PIﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۷ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ TEXT 8
ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ ،ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ
ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ
ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ PTY 9 M.C. 1ﯾﺎ LEVERﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ.
! ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ
ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ a ! ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ M.C.” ،ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ“ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻒ
)ﻟﯿﺴﺖ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ۱ ﺑﻠﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ،ﻓﻮﺭًﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺰﺷﮏ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ b ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ
ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ! ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﻫﺎ )ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ( ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ
ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﯼ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ،ﺁﺗﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ
ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ.
۲ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ،ﺍﺯ M.C.
/BAND 1ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ )،FM-2 ،FM-1
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ.
FM-3ﺑﺮﺍﯼ FMﻳﺎ (AMﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮ
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ، ﺍﺣﺘﯿﺎﻁ
ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ. ﻣﻮﺝ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ )ﮔﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺎﻡ( ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺎﻩ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ !
LEVER 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ.
ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
۳ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ،ﺍﺯ M.C.ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ! ) Manualﻣﻮﺝ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ Tuning Mode 1 23 4 5 6 7 ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ،ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. !
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ،ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ،ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻭ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
#ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺎﻧﺪﻫﺎﯼ FMﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ
ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﻠﺰﯼ ﻧﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ. !
ﻫﺮﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻧﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
LEVER 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ. ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯼ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﻠﺰﯼ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. !
#ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ UPﯾﺎ DOWNﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﮐﻮﻻﯾﺰﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ،ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻣﻼً
! ) Presetﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ Tuning !
ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
Modeﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺗﻤﯿﺰ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
89 a ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﯿﻦ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﯽ ﯾﺎ !
ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ RDS ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ
RDS ﻗﻮﺍﻧﯿﻦ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﻣﺤﯿﻄﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ
LEVER 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ.
) RDSﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ( ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﯾﺠﯿﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭘﯿﺮﻭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
! ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ LEVERﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ
ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﯼ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ.
ﻫﺎ ﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ،LEVERﻣﻮﺝ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ
ﻣﻬﻢ
ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻳﯽ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
DISP/ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. % ! ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﯼ ﺑﺎﻻ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺎ
/PTYﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﯾﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ — ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ/ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﯿﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
۵ Fa
<QRD3230-A>100
)Black plate (59,1
ﺑﺨﺶ
ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ
! ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ Pandoraﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﯿﺎ ﻭ ﻧﯿﻮﺯﻟﻨﺪ 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ M.C. ،FMﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ.
ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻘﯽ ﮐﻪ PANDORA DEH-X9650SD/DEH-X9650BT ۱۰۰) 100kHzﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(— ۵۰) 50kHzﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(
ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻤﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ 2ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻪ ) PANDORAﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ (Pandoraﺩﺭ ! ﮔﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺝ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ۵۰ﮐﯿﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﯾﯽ
ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۱۷ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﺎﻣ ًﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﯼ ﺧﻮﺩ
1ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ. ) AM stepﮔﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ (AM
ﻧﮑﺎﺕ 2ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ
ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ
ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ. ﺍﺯ AM stepﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺝ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ ) AMﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ
! ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ iPodﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺒﻌﯽ ﺑﺠﺰ ،Appﻣﯽ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ.
ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﯾﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮔﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺝ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻭ ﮔﺎﻡ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ Appﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ APPﺭﺍ
ﺟﻠﻮﯾﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺏ ﯾﺎ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻣﺎﯾﻌﺎﺕ 1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ M.C. ،AMﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ.
ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺟﻠﻮﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺟﺪﯼ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ. ۹) 9kHzﮐﯿﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(— ۱۰) 10kHzﮐﯿﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(
! ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺁﺑﯽ/ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ 3ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﯾﯽ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﮐﯿﻒ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ 2ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ،ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ
ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ،ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﻤﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ،ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ) Contrastﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ(
ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ
ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﯽ
1ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ OFF/SRCﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
! ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USBﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ 1ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺠﺪﺩًﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ M.C. 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ، ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻼﺏ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﯾﺎ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺳﻄﺢ 0 ،ﺗﺎ 15ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ،ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ USB OFF/SRC 1ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ. 2ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ.
ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. Quitﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ.
! ﺍﮔﺮ iPod1/USB1ﻭ iPod2/USB2ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ
ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ CD-) Pioneer USB
۵ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ YES
(U50Eﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ Pioneer USBﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ
ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
#ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺮﺟﯿﺢ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﺪﺩًﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ M.C. ،ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ
ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭﯼ NOﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﺩ.
Fa ۴
<QRD3230-A>101
)Black plate (58,1
ﺑﺨﺶ
LEVER 2
DISP/ 3
۳ Fa
<QRD3230-A>102
)Black plate (57,1
ﺑﺨﺶ
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻠﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﺘﺸﮑﺮﯾﻢ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭼﺎﭖ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ
۲ ﻣﺘﺸﮑﺮﯾﻢ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭼﺎﭖ(
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺪﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﺮﺩ ،ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﯾﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮑﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺧﺮﯾﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ PIONEERﻣﺘﺸﮑﺮﯾﻢ ۲ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ
ﺗﻌﻤﯿﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ PIONEERﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻤﯿﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺻﺤﯿﺢ ﺁﻥ ،ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ، ۲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻠﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﺪﯾﺪ
ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻭ ﺭﻋﺎﯾﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ
ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﯿﺎﻁ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ
ﺍﻫﻤﯿﺖ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ۳ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ
ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ۳ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ
ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ۳ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﻨﻮ
۴ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﯾﯽ
۴ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ
ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ۵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ
ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻪ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ
۵ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪ
ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ۵ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮ
! ﺷﺨﺼًﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﯾﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﯿﺮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ CD/CD-R/CD-RWﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ
ﺗﻌﻤﯿﺮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻭ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ۶ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ )(USB ،SD
ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﯿﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﯿﮑﯽ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭ ۸ iPod
ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ،ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﮎ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻦ ﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ۱۰ Bluetooth
ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﺪ. ﺟﺮﯾﺎﻥ ۱۲ Pandoraâ
! ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ .ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ۱۳ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ
ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﻭ ۱۴ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ
ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ
۱۵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ
ﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﯿﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻣﻨﯽ ﭘﺎﺭﮎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
۱۵ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ
۱۶ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ
ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ۱۶ MIXTRAX
ﺍﺣﺘﯿﺎﻁ
۱۷ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ
! ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺎﯾﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ۱۸ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﻨﻮ
ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﯾﻌﺎﺕ ۱۸ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ
ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﯾﺎ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ۱۸ AUX
ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ. ۱۸ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ
! ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ ﺣﻔﻆ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ۱۸ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﯼ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ
ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﯾﺪ.
! ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻧﺼﺐ
۱۹ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ
۲۰ ﻧﺼ ﺐ
۲۱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﯿﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ
ﺍﺣﺘﯿﺎﻁ
ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻟﯿﺰﺭﯼ ﮐﻼﺱ ۱ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﯾﻤﻨﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ
ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﻟﯿﺰﺭﯼ IEC 60825-1:2007ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ۲۲ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻋﯿﺐ
ﺍﺳﺖ. ۲۲ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﻄﺎ
۲۴ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ
۲۴ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﯼ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ )ﺩﯾﺴﮏ(USB ،SD ،
ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﯼ ﺑﺎ ۲۵ iPod
۲۵ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ
ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ ۲۶ Bluetooth
۲۶ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﯼ
۲۷ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ
Fa ۲
<QRD3230-A>103
Black plate (107,1)
PIONEER CORPORATION
1-1, Shin-ogura, Saiwai-ku, Kawasaki-shi,
Kanagawa 212-0031, JAPAN
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.
TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium/Belgique
TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936
TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
5 Arco Lane, Heatherton, Victoria, 3202 Australia
TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
340 Ferrier Street, Unit 2, Markham, Ontario L3R 2Z5, Canada
TEL: 1-877-283-5901
TEL: 905-479-4411
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso
Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000
TEL: 55-9178-4270
先鋒股份有限公司
台北市內湖區瑞光路407號8樓
電話: 886-(0)2-2657-3588
先鋒電子(香港)有限公司
香港九龍長沙灣道909號5樓
電話: 852-2848-6488
<KOKZ13H> <QRD3230-A> GS
<QRD3230-A>104